WO2018082219A1 - Method for determining bss attribution, method for sending control frame and related device - Google Patents

Method for determining bss attribution, method for sending control frame and related device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2018082219A1
WO2018082219A1 PCT/CN2017/073613 CN2017073613W WO2018082219A1 WO 2018082219 A1 WO2018082219 A1 WO 2018082219A1 CN 2017073613 W CN2017073613 W CN 2017073613W WO 2018082219 A1 WO2018082219 A1 WO 2018082219A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
color
tail
ppdu
field
control frame
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2017/073613
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
杜振国
丁志明
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201780066006.0A priority Critical patent/CN109906664B/en
Publication of WO2018082219A1 publication Critical patent/WO2018082219A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access, e.g. scheduled or random access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled or contention based access, e.g. random access, ALOHA, CSMA [Carrier Sense Multiple Access]

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method for determining a BSS attribution, a method for transmitting a control frame, a device for determining a BSS attribution, and a device for transmitting a control frame.
  • the medium access control (MAC) frame of the 802.11 standard can be divided into three categories: data frame, management frame, and control frame.
  • the MAC header address field of the part of the control frame may not include a Basic SERVICE Set Identifier (BSSID).
  • BSSID Basic SERVICE Set Identifier
  • RTS Request to Send
  • CTS Clear to Send
  • ACK Receiver Address
  • RA Receiver Address
  • the Request, BAR frame has two address fields: RA and Transmitter Address (TA) in the MAC header.
  • RA Transmitter Address
  • the DLS/TDLS transmission refers to the transmission between two stations (Stations, STAs) associated with the same access point (AP).
  • the RA domain and the TA domain are the addresses of the transmitting and receiving parties respectively, and obviously do not contain the BSSID.
  • legacy PPDU format which is a PLCP protocol data unit (PPDU) format based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) proposed by the 802.11a/g standard, where the PLCP service data unit (PLCP SERVICE data unit, PSDU) is the MAC frame.
  • legacy PPDUs are also known as non-HT PPDUs. HT is High Throughput.
  • the PLCP is the Physical Layer Convergence Procedure.
  • the HE PPDU format is the PPDU format proposed by the 802.11ax standard.
  • the physical header contains Color, which is used to indicate the identifier of the BSS to which the device transmitting the PPDU belongs, which is equivalent to a simplified representation of the BSSID.
  • the BSS ID is not included in the MAC header of the RTS, CTS, ACK, BA, and BAR, and the color cannot be carried by the physical header.
  • the Color is used to identify the BSS to which the device that sends the control frame belongs. Therefore, when the STA receives such a control frame and its address field does not include the BSSID of the BSS to which the STA belongs, the STA cannot determine whether the frame is a control frame from the BSS device. If the STA is not sure whether the received control frame is a device from the BSS, it will cause some errors in the operation of the STA.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, a method for transmitting a control frame, and a device for determining a BSS attribution and a device for transmitting a control frame, where the receiving end determines a BSS to which the control frame belongs.
  • a first aspect of the present invention provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, where the method includes: acquiring, by a second device, a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field,
  • the Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding portion
  • the PSDU field includes a control frame
  • the tail padding portion includes a first color
  • the first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the second Color may be pre-stored on the storage module of the second device. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are not the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. Thus, the second device can perform different operations according to different BSSs of the control frame. For example, if the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs, the second device may set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not affect the regular-NAV, or the second device carries according to the control frame. CF-End, release intra-NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform the corresponding operation according to the home BSS of the control frame.
  • the PPDU format can be a legacy PPDU format.
  • a device that accepts a control frame can set a correct NAV according to the attribution of the control frame, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the tail padding part further includes a check field, where the check field may be, for example, a parity code and a loop redundancy. I code and so on.
  • the implementation further includes: the second device determining, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly. If the first Color is received correctly, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. The second device can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly by the check field.
  • the setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead.
  • the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail
  • the Tail is used to improve BCC decoding at the receiving end. performance.
  • the first Color and check fields have a plurality of specific setting positions in the PPDU.
  • the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, that is, the first Color and the check field are located at the tail padding portion after the Tail, so that Make full use of the padding bits after the Tail, and do not affect the Tail.
  • the first Color and check fields are located before the Tail.
  • the Tail is set such that the decoding performance of the receiving end is not affected, and the first Color and the calibration are also guaranteed. Valid transmission of the field.
  • the end of the tail padding portion further includes remaining padding bits.
  • Pad, Pad is an all-zero sequence.
  • the remaining padding bits Pad are determined as an all-zero sequence.
  • the modification of the tail padding portion can be reduced.
  • the Pad is a known sequence at the transmitting and receiving ends, the receiving end can decode the Pad as a Tail, which is advantageous for increasing the decoding probability of the data tail bits.
  • the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail and a check field, and in the tail padding part, the check field and the first A Color is located after the Tail, and the first Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion, where Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the method of the implementation manner further includes: performing, by the second device, BCC decoding on the Tail portion and the Tail portion in the Data domain, and in the Data domain The part after Tail performs Tail-biting BCC decoding.
  • the second device determines whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field; if the first color is received correctly, the second device performs determining the first color and The pre-stored second color is the same step.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first A Color.
  • the method of the implementation manner further includes: determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. This can improve the execution efficiency of the method of the present implementation.
  • a second aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, where the method includes: the second device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a SERVICE domain and a PSDU.
  • the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
  • the second device determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, wherein the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are not the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. Therefore, the second device may perform different operations according to different BSSs of the control frame.
  • the second device may set intra according to the duration carried by the control frame. NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV, or the second device releases intra-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame, but does not affect regular-NAV.
  • the second device through the check field can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly.
  • the setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • set Color to the tail padding part of the PPDU or SERVICE The domain makes the PPDU feature backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the tail padding portion includes the first tail information Tail, the check field, and the second Tail in sequence, and the first Tail is used.
  • the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU is included First Color.
  • the method of the implementation manner further includes: determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. This can improve the execution efficiency of the method of the present implementation.
  • a third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a method for sending a control frame, where the method includes: acquiring, by a first device, a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the generated PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the control frame is included in the PSDU domain, and the tail padding portion includes the Color.
  • the first device can transmit the PPDU to the second device.
  • the second device can compare according to the Color on the PPDU and the Color of the BSS to which the second device belongs, so that the second device can determine the source of the control frame on the PPDU according to the comparison result.
  • the PPDU format can be a legacy PPDU format.
  • a device that accepts a control frame can set a correct NAV according to the attribution of the control frame, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the method before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method further includes: the first device generates a check according to the color.
  • the field the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly; the check field can be generated according to Color by an algorithm, and the check field has various forms, such as a cyclic redundancy coded CRC, a parity field, and the like. Therefore, the first device generates the PPDU carrying the control frame according to the color, and the first device generates the PPDU carrying the control frame according to the Color and the check field, and the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes the check field. In this way, the device receiving the PPDU can verify whether the Color is received correctly according to the check field, which improves the transmission reliability of the Color.
  • the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail
  • the Tail is used to improve the BCC translation of the receiving end. Code performance.
  • the Color and Check fields have various specific setting positions in the PPDU. For example, the Color and Check fields are located after the Tail, so that the padding bits after the Tail can be fully utilized, and the Tail is not affected. Or, Color and check word Before the segment is located before the Tail, the decoder does not use the known sequence of Tail for auxiliary decoding. The Tail is set such that it does not affect the decoding performance of the receiving end, and can also ensure the effective transmission of the first Color and the check field.
  • the end of the tail-filling portion further includes the remaining The padding Pad, Pad is an all-zero sequence.
  • the remaining padding bits Pad are set to the all-zero sequence, which can be reduced.
  • the receiving end can decode the Pad as a Tail, which is beneficial to increase the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits.
  • the method of the implementation manner before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method of the implementation manner further includes: the first device according to the first device Color generates a check field.
  • the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color
  • the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field
  • the tail padding portion of the PPDU further includes a check field
  • the check are located after the tail information Tail
  • Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion. Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the first device performs BCC encoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC encoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain.
  • the tail information corresponding to Color and CRC can be reduced, so that the tail padding portion does not need to fill too much data.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, the existence The indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the presence indicator can assist the receiving end to determine whether the PPDU includes Color, so that the PHY of the second device accepting the PPDU determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for performing. Identification. Thereby improving the efficiency of execution of the receiving end.
  • a fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a method for sending a control frame, where the method includes: acquiring, by a first device, a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is correctly received, and the check field may be, for example, a parity code, a cyclic redundancy code, or the like.
  • the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to a Color and a check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes Check the field.
  • the first device can transmit the PPDU to the second device.
  • the second device can compare according to the Color on the PPDU and the Color of the BSS to which the second device belongs, so that the second device can determine the source of the control frame on the PPDU. And the second device through the check field can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly.
  • the setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead.
  • the device accepting the PPDU can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform the corresponding operation according to the home BSS of the control frame.
  • the PPDU format may be, for example, a legacy PPDU format.
  • a device that accepts a PPDU can set a correct NAV according to the comparison result of Color, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases device signal transmission. opportunity.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the tail padding part includes the first tail information Tail, the check field, and the second Tail, and the first Tail is used.
  • the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU is included Color.
  • the presence indicator can assist the receiving end to determine whether the PPDU includes Color, so that the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. Thereby improving the efficiency of the method of performing the present implementation at the receiving end.
  • a fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a device for determining a BSS attribution, where the device has the function of determining a second device to which a BSS belongs in the foregoing method.
  • This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the device is a second device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • the acquiring unit is configured to obtain a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, and the PSDU domain includes a control a frame, the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • a first determining unit configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • a determining unit configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, and a PSDU domain.
  • the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the processor performs the following actions: determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • the processor performs the following actions: if the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing first aspect is performed.
  • a seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a device for determining a BSS attribution, where the device has the function of determining a second device to which a BSS belongs in the foregoing method.
  • This function can be implemented in hardware or executed by hardware. achieve.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the device is a second device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • An acquiring unit configured to obtain a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding
  • the part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly;
  • a first determining unit configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly
  • a second determining unit configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same if the first color is received correctly, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • a determining unit configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame.
  • the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly;
  • the processor performs the following actions: determining whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
  • the processor performs the following actions: if the first color is received correctly, determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • the processor performs the following actions: if the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the second aspect is performed.
  • a ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a control frame, where the apparatus has the function of a first device that transmits a control frame in the foregoing method.
  • This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the device is a first device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • An obtaining unit configured to acquire a color, and the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • a generating unit configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color
  • the PPDU includes a Data field
  • the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion
  • the PSDU field includes a control frame
  • the tail padding portion includes a Color
  • a sending unit configured to send a PPDU to the second device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the processor performs the following actions: generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: transmitting a PPDU to the second device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing third aspect is performed.
  • An eleventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a control frame, where the apparatus has the function of a first device that sends a control frame in the foregoing method.
  • This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
  • the device is a first device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • An obtaining unit configured to acquire a color, and the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • a field generating unit configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
  • a generating unit configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail padding part.
  • the check field includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail padding part.
  • a sending unit configured to send a PPDU to the second device.
  • the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the processor performs the following actions: generating a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly;
  • the processor performs the following actions: generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to a Color and a check field, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail.
  • the padding portion includes a check field;
  • the transceiver performs the following actions: transmitting a PPDU to the second device.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, and the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing fourth aspect is performed.
  • a thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the method comprising:
  • the first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the tail padding part includes the BSS of the second device.
  • Color and first tail information Tail the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
  • the first device determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
  • the first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, and includes:
  • the first device performs BCC decoding on the SERVICE domain, the PSDU, and the first tail information Tail, and performs Tail-biting decoding on a portion of the Data domain that is located after the first tail information Tail. .
  • the location of the Tail follows the PSDU, which is exactly the same as the legacy PPDU, so that the introduction of Color has no effect on the third-party legacy device receiving the PSDU part.
  • the entire Data field adopts BCC coding, which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver.
  • BCC coding which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver.
  • the Pad bits part uses the Tail-biting BCC code, which can effectively improve the reliability of the Color, but the transceiver. The complexity increases.
  • the first device receives the The PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device includes:
  • the first device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
  • Tail After Tail is moved to Color, it may affect the reception of the PSDU part by the third party legacy device, but Color has the same reliability as the PSDU part.
  • a first check field is included, the first check field being at least a checksum of the Color.
  • the introduction of the first check field enables the correct reception of Color to be verified.
  • the PPDU includes a color presence indication for indicating that the color is included in the PPDU.
  • the introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
  • the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the SERVICE is displayed.
  • the domain includes a second check field, which is a check indicating the presence of the Color.
  • the SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication and the second check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the PSDU includes a frame control field, and the Color presence indication is located in the frame control domain.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
  • the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
  • the first device determines, according to the color, whether the control frame is from the first The BSS to which the device belongs includes:
  • the first device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the color of the first device of the Color field in the received PPDU is compared, and whether the two are the same determines whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the first device.
  • a fourteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the method comprising:
  • the first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a color of the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field is at least a check for the Color, and the PSDU includes the control frame And the PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail immediately after the PSDU, the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, Before the second tail information Tail;
  • the first device determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
  • the PPDU includes a color presence indication, and is used to indicate that the color is included in the PPDU.
  • the introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
  • the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, where the a check field at least Is a check for the presence of the Color and the Color.
  • the SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication, and is verified based on the first check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report to the MAC layer. Color. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the PSDU includes a frame control field, and the color presence indication is located at the Said in the frame control domain.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
  • the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
  • the first device determines, according to the color, whether the control frame is from the first The BSS to which the device belongs includes:
  • the first device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the color of the first device of the Color field in the received PPDU is compared, and whether the two are the same determines whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the first device.
  • a fifteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the method comprising:
  • the second device generates a PPDU for carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, and the tail padding portion includes a Color and a BSS of the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • a tail information the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
  • the second device sends the PPDU.
  • the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
  • the second device after the first tail information Tail is followed by the PSDU, the second device generates PPDU for carrying control frames, including:
  • the second device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain
  • the second device performs BCC encoding on the SERVICE domain, the PSDU, and the first tail information Tail, and performs Tail-biting encoding on a portion of the Data domain that is located after the first tail information Tail.
  • the location of the Tail follows the PSDU, which is exactly the same as the legacy PPDU, so that the introduction of Color has no effect on the third-party legacy device receiving the PSDU part.
  • the entire Data domain uses BCC encoding, which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver.
  • BCC encoding which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver.
  • the Pad bits part adopts the Tail-biting BCC code, which can effectively improve the reliability of the Color, but the complexity of the transceiver end is increased.
  • the first tail information Tail is located after the color, and the second device is generated for A PPDU carrying a control frame, including:
  • the second device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
  • Tail After Tail is moved to Color, it may affect the reception of the PSDU part by the third party legacy device, but Color has the same reliability as the PSDU part.
  • the tail filling portion is further A first check field is included, the first check field being at least a checksum of the Color.
  • the introduction of the first check field enables the correct reception of Color to be verified.
  • the PPDU includes a color presence indication for indicating that the color is included in the PPDU.
  • the introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
  • the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the SERVICE is displayed.
  • the domain includes a second check field, which is a check indicating the presence of the Color.
  • the SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication and the second check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the PSDU includes a frame control domain, and the color presence indication is located at the location Said in the frame control domain.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
  • the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
  • a sixteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the method comprising:
  • the second device generates a PPDU for carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, and the SERVICE domain includes a Color of a BSS to which the second device belongs,
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field is at least a check for the Color, and the PSDU includes the control frame, and
  • the PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail is immediately after the PSDU, and the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, the second tail Before the information Tail;
  • the second device sends the PPDU.
  • the SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
  • the PPDU includes a color presence indication, and is used to indicate that the color is included in the PPDU.
  • the introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
  • the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, where the preamble domain Preamble is located in the data domain.
  • the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the first check field is at least Is a check for the presence of the Color and the Color.
  • the SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication, and is verified based on the first check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report to the MAC layer. Color. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
  • the PSDU includes a frame control field, where the Color presence indication is located in the frame control domain. .
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
  • the PSDU includes a receiving address field, where the Color presence indication is located in the receiving address field.
  • the Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
  • a seventeenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the apparatus comprising:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the tail padding part includes the second device a color of the BSS and a first tail information Tail, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
  • a decoding module configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color
  • a determining module configured to determine, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the device belongs.
  • the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
  • An eighteenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the apparatus comprising:
  • a receiving module configured to receive a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail
  • the first check field is at least a check for the Color
  • the PSDU includes the Controlling a frame
  • the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail immediately after the PSDU, and the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, Before the second tail information Tail;
  • a decoding module configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color
  • the determining module determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the device belongs.
  • the SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
  • a nineteenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the apparatus comprising:
  • a generating module configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, where the tail padding portion includes a Color and a first tail of the BSS to which the device belongs Information Tail, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
  • An encoding module configured to encode the Data field of the PPDU
  • a sending module configured to send the PPDU.
  • the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
  • a twentieth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the apparatus comprising:
  • a generating module configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, where the SERVICE domain includes a Color of a BSS to which the device belongs, and the tail padding
  • the part includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field to Less is the check of the Color
  • the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, and the first tail information Tail is immediately after the PSDU
  • the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail and before the second tail information Tail;
  • a decoding module configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color
  • a sending module configured to send the PPDU.
  • the SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
  • Yet another aspect of the present application provides a computer readable storage medium having instructions stored therein that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
  • Yet another aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the various aspects above.
  • the first device after the first device acquires the first color that is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes the Data field.
  • the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, a tail padding portion, or a SERVICE field of the Data field includes a first color, and then the first device sends a PPDU to the second device, so that the second device obtains the first A PPDU carrying a control frame sent by a device.
  • the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines the control The frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a virtual carrier application RTS/CTS mechanism
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of four PPDU structures provided by the prior art
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a Legacy PPDU format provided by the prior art
  • FIG. 5a is a schematic diagram of a MAC frame format of an RTS provided by the prior art
  • FIG. 5b is a schematic diagram of a MAC frame format of a CTS/ACK provided by the prior art
  • 6a is a schematic structural diagram of an RTS-based Control Wrapper frame provided by the prior art
  • 6b is a schematic structural diagram of a CTS/ACK-based Control Wrapper frame provided by the prior art
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in the method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
  • 9a is a partial structural diagram of a PPDU involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
  • 9b is a schematic structural diagram of another part of a PPDU involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a BCC encoding performed by a transmitting device involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 11;
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 14 is a comparison diagram of a structure of a PPDU and a structure of a Legacy PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 14;
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 16;
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-SIG including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a Frame Control field including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a SERVICE domain including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an RA domain including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the communication system may be used to perform a method for determining a BSS attribution and a method for transmitting a control frame according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the network architecture includes an access point (AP) 101, an AP 102, a station (Station, STA) 111, a STA 112, and a STA 113.
  • STA 111 and STA 112 are associated with AP 101
  • STA 113 is associated with AP 102
  • STA 112 can receive frames from AP 101 and AP 102.
  • STA 111 and STA 112 belong to the same BSS as AP1
  • STA 113 and AP 102 belong to the same BSS.
  • a BSS is a cell, a system consisting of an AP and its associated STAs.
  • WiFi Wireless Local Area Network
  • IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 802.11 working group
  • HEW High Efficiency WLAN
  • project code 802.11ax project code 802.11ax
  • the goal is to increase the system capacity to more than 10 Gbps, paying special attention to the outdoor deployment and high-density deployment of WiFi devices.
  • HEW High Efficiency WLAN
  • the 802.11 standard uses the Virtual Carrier Sense mechanism for transmission protection.
  • the sender and the receiver carry a transmission duration value (Duration) in the transmission frame, indicating the remaining duration of the current transmission process, thereby forming protection for the subsequent transmission duration.
  • Duration transmission duration value
  • other devices receive the transmission frame of the sender or receiver, they will set their own Network Allocation Vector (NAV) timer according to the transmission duration value carried in it. Thereafter, the NAV is decremented. Before the NAV timer is decremented to zero, even if the wireless channel is detected to be idle, the device cannot actively transmit data, thereby avoiding interference with other ongoing transmissions.
  • NAV Network Allocation Vector
  • a typical virtual carrier application is the RTS/CTS mechanism, as shown in Figure 2.
  • the source Source carries the time from the end of the RTS frame to the end of the ACK in the Duration field of the transmitted RTS frame. If the destination destination receives the RTS frame correctly, the time between the end of the CTS and the end of the ACK is carried in the response frame CTS.
  • Other devices set their own NAV according to the Duration field in the RTS/CTS frame. If the NAV of other devices has been set, the NAV and Duration values must be compared first when the new Duration field is received. Only when the Duration value is greater than the current NAV value, you need to reset the NAV with the Duration value.
  • Duration field is not only included in the RTS/CTS frame, but is included in all control, management, and data frames, so it can be used to set the NAV.
  • the NAV set according to the above-mentioned carrier sensing mechanism has a problem of being released by the contention-free end (CF-End) error, because the device receives the CF-End sent by any device and resets its own NAV. The NAV timer will be cleared.
  • CF-End contention-free end
  • STA 111 and STA 112 are associated with AP 101
  • STA 113 is associated with AP 102
  • STA 112 can receive frames from AP 101 and AP 102. If the NAV of the STA 112 is set according to the Duration of the frame from the AP 101, when the STA 112 receives the CF-End from the AP 102, the NAV is reset, and the contention channel is started and transmitted to the AP 101, which occurs with the transmission of the STA 111 to the AP 101 at the AP 101.
  • the STA 112 Conversely, if the NAV of the STA 112 is set according to the Duration of the frame from the AP 102, the STA 112 resets the NAV when receiving the CF-End from the AP 101, and starts to contend for the channel and transmits to the AP 101, which is transmitted with the STA 113 to the AP 102. A collision occurs at AP102.
  • the root cause of the above conflict is that the NAV set by the STA based on the frame of one BSS is released by the CF-End from another BSS, and the transmission protection is not achieved.
  • a BSS is a cell, a system consisting of an AP and its associated STAs.
  • the NAV maintained by each device includes both intra-NAV (internal NAV) and regular-NAV (conventional NAV).
  • intra-NAV internal NAV
  • regular-NAV conventional NAV
  • the regular-NAV is set based on the Duration carried therein, but the intra-NAV is not affected. Accordingly, when the device receives a CF-End from the BSS, only the intra-NAV is released; when the device receives a CF-End from the OBSS, only the regular-NAV is released. In this way, the problem that the NAV set according to the frame from one BSS is released by the CF-End error from another BSS is avoided, thereby avoiding collision. Normally, determining whether a frame is a BSS frame or not is based on the MAC portion of the frame.
  • the BSSID is usually 48 bits, which is generally the same as the address of the AP, but it can be different.
  • the STA 112 may determine, according to the BSSID in the frame, that the frame is from the BSS to which the STA 112 belongs, so that the STA 112 may set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried in the frame, but does not affect the regular- NAV.
  • the STA 112 may determine, according to the BSSID in the frame, that the frame is not from the BSS to which the STA 112 belongs, so that the STA 112 may set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried in the frame, but does not affect the intra- NAV. In this way, the problem that the STA is released based on the CF-End of another BSS based on the frame setting of one BSS can be avoided. Thus, the purpose of transmission protection is achieved.
  • the HE-SIG-A of the physical headers of the four PPDU structures designed by 802.11ax includes Color (color) and TXOP Duration (transmission opportunity duration), as shown in FIG. BSS Color in 3.
  • the color length is 6 bits, which is the short identifier of the BSS, which is equivalent to the simplified representation of the BSSID.
  • Color is located in B8-B13, and HE is Multi-User (Multiple).
  • MU Multi-User
  • the color of the PPDU is located in the B5-B10 bit.
  • the color of a BSS is usually determined by the AP when it initializes the network, but can be modified at any time.
  • the TXOP Duration is the aforementioned Duration, but it was previously placed in the MAC header (in Data in Figure 3), while 802.11ax is also carried in the physical header.
  • the physical head carries Color and Transmission Opportunity (TXOP) Duration, so that any device can determine the BSS attribution of the frame according to the physical header, and set the NAV according to the TXOP Duration without having to solve the MAC part, thereby saving power.
  • TXOP Color and Transmission Opportunity
  • the BSSID may not be included in the MAC frame of some frames, and it cannot carry the Color through the physical header to indicate the attribution of the BSS.
  • the MAC frames in 802.11 can be divided into three categories: data frames, management frames, and control frames.
  • the data frame and the management frame have at least three address domains, and at least one of the address domains carries a BSSID.
  • control frames are not the case.
  • the MAC header address field of a partial control frame may not contain a BSSID.
  • Table 1 the current common control frames in the 802.11 standard of the 2.4/5 GHz band can be divided into two categories, such as PS-Poll and Trigger.
  • the MAC header includes two address domains, RA and TA, and must have One address field is the BSSID.
  • the MAC header address field may not include the BSSID: for CTS and ACK frames, since there are only RA domains in the MAC header, when used for DL transmission and DLS/TDLS transmission, the RA domain is not The BSSID is included; for the RTS, BA, and BAR frames, there are two address domains, RA and TA, in the MAC header.
  • the DLS/TDLS transmission refers to the transmission between two STAs associated with the same AP.
  • the RA domain and the TA domain are the addresses of the transmitting and receiving parties respectively, and obviously do not contain the BSSID.
  • control frames such as RTS and CTS are mainly used for transmission protection, and legacy devices should also be able to receive. Therefore, these control frames cannot be transmitted in the HE PPDU format, but can only be transmitted using the legacy PPDU format.
  • the BSS attribution is indicated by the physical header including Color.
  • the so-called legacy PPDU format that is, the OFDM-based PPDU format proposed by the 802.11a/g standard, is shown in FIG. 4, where the PSDU is a MAC frame.
  • Legacy PPDUs are also known as non-HT PPDUs.
  • the STA Since the BSS ID is not included in the MAC header of the RTS, CTS, ACK, BA, and BAR, and the color cannot be carried by the physical header, when the STA receives such a control frame and the address field does not include the BSSID of the BSS to which the STA belongs. The STA cannot determine whether this frame is a control frame from the BSS device. According to the current rule, the STA will update its regular-NAV using Duration in the frame, but the regular-NAV can only be released by the CF-End from the OBSS.
  • the control frame is actually from the device AP101 in the BSS.
  • the STA 112 receives the CF-End from the BSS, the regular-NAV is not released, but since the MAC header of the frame does not include the BSSID, And the color cannot be transmitted by the physical header, and the STA 112 cannot determine whether the frame is a control frame from the BSS device, so that the SAT 112 releases the regular-NAV according to the control frame, which reduces the chance of the STA 112 being sent; when the STA receives the CF from the OBSS When -End, regular-NAV is released, which causes the STA to contend for the channel and send it to the AP, thereby causing interference to the ongoing transmission.
  • the STA when the STA receives a control frame that cannot determine the BSS attribution but actually comes from the BSS device and then sets the regular-NAV, the dual NAV mechanism is completely invalid, the problem that the NAV is released by mistake will occur, and the NAV may not be The situation of release, thereby causing interference to the ongoing transmission, or reducing the transmission opportunity of the STA.
  • the present application provides a method for enabling the device to effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference.
  • the Legacy PPDU format is as shown in FIG. 4, which is composed of a preamble domain Preamble and a data Data field, and the Data domain includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding section.
  • the PSDU is a MAC frame.
  • the PSDU is generated by the MAC layer and transmitted to the physical layer (Physical Layer; PHY).
  • the PHY adds a 2 bytes SERVICE field before the PSDU, and adds 6 bits of tail information (Tail) and possibly existing pad bits to the PSDU to form a Data field.
  • the PHY performs scrambling, Binary Convolutional Code (BCC) channel coding, interleaving, modulation, spatial mapping, and the like on the entire Data to form a processed Data field.
  • BCC Binary Convolutional Code
  • L-Short Training Field STF
  • L-LTF Long Training Field
  • L-Signal Domain Signal Domain
  • SIG L-Signal Domain
  • L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG are called physical headers, also known as preamble domain Preamble, or old preamble domain L-preamble
  • Tail and Pad bits located after PSDU are also called tail-filled parts.
  • the Tail is usually a 6-bit all-zero sequence, which is to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • Pad bits are also all zero sequences, which are used to make the length of the Data field an integer multiple of the number of valid bits per symbol (N DBPS ).
  • DBPS is Data Bits per OFDM Symbol (data bits per OFDM symbol). The so-called effective number of bits per symbol refers to the number of uncoded bits carried in each OFDM symbol.
  • Equation (1) is a process in which the PHY of the transmitting end calculates the Pad bit length (N PAD ), where LENGTH is the PSDU length (ie, the MAC frame length, unit: bytes), and the MAC layer informs the PHY through the primitive. Obviously, the length of the Pad bits is also variable due to the variable value of LENGTH.
  • N SYM Ceiling((16+8 ⁇ LENGTH+6)/N DBPS )
  • N DATA N SYM ⁇ N DBPS
  • N PAD N DATA -(16+8 ⁇ LENGTH+6)
  • the difference from the data frame and the management frame is that the length of most control frames is relatively fixed. For the 8 Modulation and Coding Schemes (MCS) supported by the Legacy PPDU, these control frames are The length of the Pad bits is determinable. Table 2 shows the Pad bit lengths of the RTS frame and the CTS/ACK frame under various MCSs, where QAM is Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
  • the MAC frame format of the RTS and CTS is as shown in FIG. 5(a) and FIG. 5(b), and the ACK frame is identical to the MAC frame format of the CTS frame.
  • R1 - R4 are the values of the RATE field in the L-SIG, indicating the MCS index; the four MCS in italics are mandatory MCS, and the other MCS are optional supported MCS.
  • the RTS and CTS/ACK frames have at least 10 bits of Pad bits, and the Color is 6 bits, so the Pad bits of these control frames are sufficient to carry Color.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application solves the problem that the device effectively distinguishes the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format, that is, by carrying Color in the Pad bits portion of the control frame or carrying the Color on the SERVICE field of the PPDU carrying the control frame.
  • BA/BAR is used in the block acknowledgment process, which is obviously located in the final stage of an exchange sequence, that is, the Duration value in its MAC frame is small, even if it is set with the wrong NAV. It runs out quickly, and in such a short period of time, the probability of receiving CF-End causing interference or being unable to be released is small.
  • RTS/CTS is different. They are located in the initial stage of an interaction sequence and are used to transmit and protect the remaining time of the current interaction sequence. Therefore, the Duration in the MAC frame is large.
  • the BSS attribution of the RTS/CTS cannot be determined, Furthermore, if regular-NAV is set according to the duration, it will last for a long time, and the probability of occurrence of interference or being unable to be released is large.
  • the ACK frame is generally located in the last stage of an interaction sequence, and the Duration is small, but when the ACK is used for Fragmentation transmission, the Duration of the ACK frame is used to transmit and protect the subsequent data and the acknowledgement frame. At this time, the ACK is The Duration will also be larger. Therefore, the present application is mainly directed to three kinds of Duration large management frames of RTS/CTS/ACK and Control Wrapper frames based on these three frames.
  • the control Wrapper frame structure based on RTS/CTS/ACK is shown in Fig. 6(a) and Fig. 6(b). Using the analysis similar to Table 2, it can be found that their Pad bits are at least 10 bits long.
  • control frame transmission uses non-HT duplicate (non-high throughput copy) transmission, that is, first generate a 20 MHz control frame, and then perform frequency domain copying in units of 20 MHz, then each 20 MHz control frame is Color is included in the Pad bits. In other words, Color is located in the Pad bits of the 20MHz control frame. When copying in the frequency domain, the Color in the Pad bits is also copied, so that each 20MHz Pad bits has Color information.
  • non-HT duplicate non-high throughput copy
  • the method for determining the BSS attribution and the method for sending the control frame do not change the frame structure of the control frame, and the Color is placed in the legacy PPDU, so that the third party device can obtain the Color, thereby determining the BSS attribution of the current control frame. At the same time, it does not affect the legitimate device receiving the control frame correctly.
  • the Legacy device refers to a device that does not support the solution of the present application.
  • the first device acquires a first color, and the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color.
  • the first device sends a PPDU to the second device. Therefore, the second device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device.
  • the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the second device may perform a corresponding operation according to the determination result. For example, when the second device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the second device belongs, the second device may perform the duration setting according to the control frame. intra-NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV, or the second device releases intra-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame, but does not affect regular-NAV. If the first color in the PPDU is different from the second color pre-stored by the second device, the second device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is not from the BSS to which the second device belongs. Therefore, the second device can set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not affect the intra-NAV, or only releases the regular-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame.
  • the first device acquires a first color, and the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a check field according to the first color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly. Then, the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, where the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes A control frame, the tail padding portion including a check field.
  • the first device may send the PPDU to the second device, so that the second device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device. Then, the second device determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, The second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the specific process of determining the source of the control frame in the PPDU and the operation performed according to the judgment result may refer to the corresponding description of the tail padding portion of the Data field in which the Color is filled into the PPDU.
  • the first device after the first device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes the Data field.
  • the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, a tail padding portion, or a SERVICE field of the Data field may include a first color, and then the first device sends a PPDU to the second device, so that the second device acquires The PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device.
  • the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines the control frame From the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format, and the PPDU can be in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the double The NAV mechanism is more efficient, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • backward compatibility means that the PPDUs in this padding mode can be correctly understood by the legacy device, that is, the new content in the PPDU does not affect the reception of the control frame carried by the legacy device to the PPDU.
  • each method for determining the BSS attribution of these embodiments includes sending a control frame.
  • the method and the method of determining the attribution of BSS are two parts.
  • the PPDUs in the following embodiments of the present application are described by taking a legacy PPDU as an example.
  • the available Pad bits for the RTS/CTS/ACK frame is only 10 bits. If BCC encoding is used, the Pad bits must include Color (6 bits), Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) (at least 4 bits) and Tail (6 bits). Obviously, the 10 bits of Pad bits is not enough to carry so much information. In view of this, the Tail-biting BCC encoding is used for the Pad bits portion, and the Tail portion can be omitted, that is, only Color (6 bits) and CRC (4 bits) are transmitted, for a total of 10 bits.
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Code
  • Step 701 The sending device acquires the first color.
  • the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs.
  • the control frame sent by the sending device in the legacy PPDU format that is, the control frame is carried by the legacy PPDU.
  • the transmitting device acquires the first Color, for example, the pre-stored first Color may be acquired from a storage module on the transmitting device, or the transmitting device acquires the first Color from the AP.
  • the first color is usually determined by the AP when the network is initialized, but can also be modified at any time.
  • the specific form of the first Color can be referred to the specific description of Color in the above.
  • Step 702 The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
  • the CRC is a check code used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly.
  • the transmitting device After the sending device sends the first color, the receiving device acquires the first color, and the receiving end needs to determine whether the first color is received correctly, so as to improve the reliability of Color receiving. To achieve this, the transmitting device first generates a CRC according to the first Color before transmitting the first Color. The receiving end can verify whether the first color is received correctly according to the CRC. Wherein the transmitting device can generate a CRC according to the first Color using a predefined algorithm.
  • the CRC is only one form of implementation verification, and is carried in the check field.
  • the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
  • the check field may also carry other specific forms of check codes, for example, a parity check code, etc., the present application
  • the specific form of the check field is not specifically limited in the embodiment.
  • Step 703 The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the CRC.
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color.
  • the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field.
  • the check field and the first color are located after the tail information Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion.
  • the sending device when generating the PPDU carrying the control frame, the sending device fills the acquired first color into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, and fills the CRC into the tail padding portion.
  • the first color is filled in the tail fill portion And CRC, and after the CRC and the first Color are located at the tail information Tail, the first Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion.
  • FIG. 7 regarding the specific structure of the PPDU, reference may be made to the structural diagram of the PPDU shown in FIG. 8.
  • Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the MAC layer of the sending device transmits the PSDU to the PHY, and the first color and the CRC are also required.
  • the element of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR is passed to the PHY via the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive.
  • the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC layer contains the first element of Color and CRC, it will not be filled with 0 when padding the Pad bits, but will be filled according to the method of this embodiment, that is, the Color and CRC are filled in.
  • the Pad bits portion of the PPDU In this way, the transmitting device can generate the PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first Color and the CRC.
  • FIG. 8 it is a Data field structure of a legacy PPDU format control frame in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the CRC in the original position for placing the Pad bits, in the embodiment, the CRC, the first color, and the remaining Pad bits (ie, the Pad in the figure) may be placed; the CRC is at least the verification of the Color, and in some implementations. In the example, the CRC may also be a check of the Pad and the first Color.
  • the order of the Pad and the CRC can be interchanged, as shown in Figure 9(a).
  • the Pad can also be divided into two parts, Pad1 and Pad2, which are located before and after the CRC, as shown in Figure 9(b). In short, the CRC can be located in a fixed position in the original Pad bits.
  • the existence of the Pad is due to the fact that the original Pad bits may be longer than 10 bits. After using 10 bits to carry Color and CRC, there will be some Pads remaining. These Pads can be filled with 0 or used to carry other information. Obviously, if the original Pad bits are exactly 10 bits, there will be no Pad, so the Pad fields in Figures 8, 9a and 9b are indicated by dashed boxes.
  • the transmitting device uses the first color to be transmitted as shown in FIG. 10
  • the initial values of the illustrated 802.11 BCC encoder are BCC encoded for Pad bits, CRC, and Color, and the encoder initial value First Color forms a "tail biting" with the first Color of the tail of the transmitted data.
  • the sending device may generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, that is, in the generated PPDU, the CRC may not be included.
  • the sending device may not perform the step. 702.
  • Step 704 The transmitting device performs BCC encoding on the Tail and Tail portions in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC encoding on the portion after the Tail in the Data domain.
  • the first Color is set at the end of the tail-fill portion in preparation for Tail-biting BCC encoding.
  • the PHY layer of the transmitting device uses the traditional BCC encoding for the portion before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and the Tail-biting BCC encoding for the portion after the Tail, and the encoding for the Tail-biting BCC encoding.
  • the initial value of the device is the first Color.
  • the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device can send the PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device performs a corresponding operation, for example, the receiving device can be based on the first color on the PPDU.
  • the source of the control frame carried by the PPDU or the PPDU is determined, as shown in steps 708 and 709 below.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the presence indication may be populated to the PPDU when the transmitting device generates the PPDU.
  • the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU.
  • the presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer. This can improve the efficiency of the receiving device performing the method of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the tail padding portion for indicating the PPDU includes the first Color.
  • the presence indicator is 1 bit in the PPDU.
  • the tail padding portion of the current PPDU includes the first color.
  • the receiving device needs to identify the first color, or needs to fill the tail of the PPDU.
  • the bit sequence corresponding to the first Color in the portion is passed to the MAC layer.
  • Step 705 The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device.
  • the PPDU acquired by the receiving device includes a Data field
  • the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion
  • the PSDU field includes a control frame
  • the tail padding portion includes a first color, a first color. It is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the sending device belongs.
  • the tail padding portion includes a tail information Tail, a first color, and a check field.
  • the check field and the first color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance at the receiving end.
  • Step 706 The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain.
  • the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU
  • the receiving device needs to perform corresponding decoding operations on the Data field in order to obtain information such as the first Color on the PPDU.
  • the receiving device receives the frame sent by the sending device
  • the decoding is performed according to the traditional BCC, that is, the portion after the Tail is ignored.
  • the receiving device is a device that can perform the corresponding method in the embodiment of the present application
  • the PHY of the receiving device is decoded according to the traditional BCC for the part before the Tail (including the Tail), and the Tail-biting is followed for the part after the Tail.
  • the BCC performs decoding and passes the decoded results of both parts to the MAC layer.
  • the verification of Color can also be completed by the PHY of the receiving device. If the verification is correct, the PHY transmits the Color to the MAC layer.
  • the method further includes: before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU includes the presence indication If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 707 and the like. If the PPDU does not include a presence indication, the receiving device does not perform the subsequent steps below. The receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication may be performed after step 706, and may also be performed before step 706. The specific implementation manner may be determined according to the specific form of the presence indication.
  • Step 707 The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly; if the first color receives positive Indeed, the receiving device performs step 708.
  • the tail padding portion of the Data field includes a CRC, which is used by the receiving device to verify whether the received first color is received correctly after receiving the PPDU, so that the execution reliability of the method in the embodiment of the present application can be improved.
  • the receiving device calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC at the MAC layer or the PHY. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 708 and the like, otherwise step 708 is not performed.
  • Step 708 The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 709.
  • the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, and the second color may be stored in the receiving device.
  • the related content of the second color may refer to the corresponding description of the color.
  • the receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, otherwise, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the receiving device belongs, that is, determining This control frame comes from other BSSs.
  • Step 709 The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the receiving device may determine that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. Thereby, the receiving device can perform an operation related to the control frame from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. For example, the receiving device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, and the receiving device can set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not change the regular-NAV, or the receiving device according to the control The CF-End carried by the frame releases the intra-NAV, but does not change the regular-NAV.
  • the receiving device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is not from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. Therefore, the receiving device can set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not change the intra-NAV, or only releases the regular-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame.
  • this embodiment proposes that the traditional BCC is used together with the previous SERVICE and PSUD for the first Color and CRC placed at the original Pad bit position.
  • Encoding as shown in Figure 11.
  • the CRC is at least a check for the first color, and the CRC and the first color are exchanged in tandem.
  • the meaning of Pad in FIG. 11 is the same as that of Pad in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but the position should be after the first Color and CRC and the value should be all 0, which will not be described again.
  • the method in this embodiment of the present application includes:
  • Step 1201 The sending device acquires the first Color.
  • the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the transmitting device belongs.
  • Step 1201 can refer to step 701.
  • Step 1202 The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
  • the CRC is used by the receiving end to verify that Color is received correctly
  • Step 1202 can refer to step 702.
  • Step 1203 The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field.
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color and a check field.
  • the tail padding part also includes the tail information Tail.
  • the first Color and the CRC are located after the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the transmitting device when the transmitting device generates the PPDU, the first Color and the CRC are filled into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, and in the tail padding portion, the first Color and the CRC are located after the Tail.
  • the Tail is used to improve the decoding performance of the BCC at the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the CRC may further verify the Pad.
  • the Pad Bits part is assumed to be an all-zero sequence in the original standard, in the embodiment of the present application, the Pad part is set to the all-zero sequence, and the original filling mode can be changed in the Pad part, and The receiving end can also decode the Pad as a Tail, which is equivalent to increasing the length of the Tail, which is beneficial to increasing the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits. This is specifically related to the Viterbi decoding algorithm.
  • the Pad bits portion may not include the Pad.
  • the transmitting device fills the first color and the CRC into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, where the CRC is at least a check for the first color. Also, in comparison with the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, in the embodiment of the present application, in the tail padding portion, the order of the CRC and the first Color can be exchanged.
  • Step 1204 The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
  • the sending device Before transmitting the PPDU, the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU, and uses the traditional BCC encoding together with the previous SERVICE domain and the PSUD domain for the first Color and CRC placed in the original Pad bit position.
  • the sending device After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame. After the sending device sends the PPDU to the receiving device, the receiving device may perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, and determine the PPDU according to the first color. Whether the bearer control frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. See the description below for details.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first Color.
  • the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU.
  • the presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer.
  • Step 1205 The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the receiving device may receive the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail padding unit.
  • the minute includes a first Color and a check field, and the first Color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the transmitting device belongs.
  • the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • Step 1206 The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
  • the sending device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the receiving device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first Color and CRC of the Data field.
  • the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the conventional BCC, and the decoding result of the Pad bits also needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer. This is consistent with the processing method of the Data field of the PPDU by the sender and the receiver in the prior art, and thus does not bring about an increase in device complexity.
  • the method of the embodiment further includes: the receiving device, before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. Determining whether the PPDU includes a presence indication; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or step 1207 is performed, otherwise the receiving device does not perform the following steps in the following, thus improving the execution efficiency of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication may be performed after step 1206, and may also be performed before step 1206.
  • the specific implementation manner may be determined according to the specific form of the presence indication.
  • Step 1207 The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first Color is received correctly. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs step 1208.
  • the tail padding portion of the Data field includes a CRC, which is used by the receiving device to verify whether the received first color is received correctly after receiving the PPDU, thereby improving the reliability of the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the receiving device calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC at the MAC layer or the PHY. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 1208 and the like, otherwise step 1208 is not performed.
  • Step 1208 The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1209.
  • the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • Step 1208 can refer to step 708.
  • Step 1209 The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • Step 1209 can refer to step 709.
  • the padding part uses the traditional BCC but does not contain the CRC
  • this embodiment proposes to use the location where the pad bits are originally placed to carry the first color, but does not include the CRC, as shown in FIG. schematic diagram.
  • the reason why the CRC is not added is mainly because the PSDU includes a check for the PSDU, for example, a Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field in the RTS/CTS/ACK frame, and the length of the PSDU is much larger than the first. Color, so when the PSDU check is correct, the first Color is also correct with great probability.
  • the length of the Pad is greater than or equal to 4 bits.
  • Pad can also be regarded as Tail, so it should be filled in 0.
  • the receiving end can effectively improve the correct receiving probability of the first color by using Pad.
  • the scheme of the present embodiment has higher transmission reliability than the first Color of the scheme of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the PPDU does not include the CRC, and thus the method in the embodiment of the present application does not need to perform the steps related to the CRC.
  • the transmitting device does not need to perform step 1202, nor does it need to fill the CRC into the tail padding portion, and the receiving device does not need to perform step 1207.
  • the frame structure of the embodiment of the present application is the frame structure shown in FIG.
  • this embodiment proposes that the tail padding part in the legacy PPDU format control frame, that is, Tail+Pad bits Part (16+x bits total), replaced by the first Color (6bits), CRC (4bits), Tail (6bits) and possibly existing Pad (x bits), as shown in Figure 14.
  • the channel coding mode of the entire Data domain is unchanged, that is, the traditional BCC coding is adopted.
  • the method in this embodiment of the present application includes:
  • Step 1501 The sending device acquires the first Color.
  • the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the transmitting device belongs.
  • Step 1501 can refer to step 701.
  • Step 1502 The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
  • the CRC is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly.
  • Step 1502 can refer to step 702.
  • Step 1503 The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field.
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color and a CRC.
  • the tail padding part also includes the tail information Tail, the first Color and the CRC are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the order of the first Color and the CRC may be interchanged, but the Tail must be after the first Color and the CRC.
  • the CRC is at least a check for the first Color.
  • the sending device fills the first color and the CRC into the end of the PPDU when generating the PPDU carrying the control frame.
  • the portion is filled, and the first Color and CRC are located before the Tail.
  • the MAC layer of the sending device needs to transmit the PSDU to the PHY, and also needs to pass the Color and CRC as elements of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR to the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive.
  • PHY When the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC contains the first element of Color and CRC, For the PSDU, it is no longer necessary to add the Tail first and then add the Pad bits, but to process according to the scheme of the embodiment. Thereafter, the processing of the Data field by the PHY is identical to that of the legacy transmitter for the Data field in the legacy PPDU.
  • Step 1504 The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
  • the PHY of the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU, specifically, the BCC is used to encode the Data field.
  • the sending device After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, and the receiving device can perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, and determine the control of the PPDU according to the first color. Whether the frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the presence indication is carried in the PPDU, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the sending device After the sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data field, the sending device can send the PPDU to the receiving device.
  • Step 1505 The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the PPDU acquired by the receiving device includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to belong to the sending device.
  • the basic service set BSS is identified; the tail padding portion also includes a check field.
  • the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • Step 1506 The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
  • the sending device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the transmitting device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first Color and CRC of the Data field.
  • the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the conventional BCC, and the decoding result of the Pad bits also needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer. This is consistent with the processing method of the Data field of the PPDU by the sender and the receiver in the prior art, and thus does not bring about an increase in device complexity.
  • the decoder may use Tail as the known knowledge of the all-zero sequence. However, the decoder may also use the known knowledge of the full-zero sequence for the auxiliary translation. code. Whether the decoder uses Tail to assist the decoding of the known knowledge of the all-zero sequence depends entirely on the internal implementation of the device. If the legacy device uses the latter decoding mode, the PPDU filling method proposed in this embodiment does not affect the reception of the legacy device.
  • the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU includes the presence The indication; if the PPDU includes the presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or step 1507 is performed, otherwise the receiving device does not perform the following steps in the following, so that the execution efficiency of the embodiment of the present application can be improved.
  • Step 1507 The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly. If the first color receives If so, the receiving device performs step 1508.
  • Step 1507 can refer to step 707.
  • Step 1508 The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1509.
  • the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • Step 1509 The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • Step 1509 can refer to step 709.
  • the sending device After the sending device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the sending device belongs, the sending device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes the PSDU field and the tail.
  • the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the same The BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-receiving device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • SERVICE carries Color
  • Pad bits carry CRC.
  • this embodiment proposes to use the 6bits in the 9bits reserved bits of the SERVICE field to carry the Color.
  • the CRC (4bits) and Tail (6bits) of Color are carried by 10bits in the original Pad bits.
  • the TSUL of the PSDU is called the first Tail (Tail1)
  • the Tail after the CRC is called the second Tail (Tail2), as shown in Figure 16.
  • Tail2 is an all-zero sequence. Since there is 6bits of Tail2 after the CRC, the reliability of the CRC is exactly the same as the SERVICE and PSDU parts.
  • the method in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
  • Step 1701 The sending device acquires the first Color.
  • the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs.
  • Step 1701 can refer to step 701.
  • Step 1702 The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
  • the check field CRC is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly.
  • Step 1702 can refer to step 702.
  • Step 1703 The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field.
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field CRC.
  • the tail padding portion sequentially includes the first tail information Tail, CRC, and the second Tail, that is, Tail1, CRC, and Tail2 are sequentially arranged in the tail padding portion in order.
  • the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end
  • the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end. That is, Tail1 is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end
  • Tail2 is used to improve the BCC decoding performance (ie, reliability) of the check field CRC.
  • Tail2 is set to an all-zero sequence. It can be understood that Tail2 can also be set to other sequence forms, as long as Tail2 is a sequence known to the sender and the receiver, such as the receiver and the sender. The specific form of Tail2 is agreed upon. As long as Tail2 is a well-known sequence between the sender and the receiver, the reliability of the check field can be improved.
  • the sending end is a sending device
  • the receiving end is a receiving device.
  • the end of the tail-filling portion further includes a Pad.
  • Pad in Fig. 16 is the same as that of Pad in the embodiment shown in Fig. 7, but the position should be after Tail2 and the value should be all zeros. Since the Pad Bits part is a zero sequence in the original standard, in the embodiment of the present application, the Pad part is set to the all-zero sequence, and the original padding mode can be changed in the Pad part, and is received.
  • the terminal can also decode the Pad as a Tail, which is equivalent to increasing the length of the Tail, which is beneficial to increasing the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits. This is specifically related to the Viterbi decoding algorithm.
  • Step 1704 The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
  • the transmitting device performs channel coding on the entire Data field shown in FIG. 16 using BCC.
  • the MAC layer of the sending device transmits the PSDU to the PHY, and also needs to pass the Color and CRC as elements of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR to the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive.
  • PHY When the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC contains the first element of Color and CRC, the first 4 bits are filled with CRC instead of 0 when padding the Pad bits, and the first Color is carried by the 6 bits reserved bit in SERVICE. The PHY then performs traditional BCC encoding on the entire Data field.
  • the sending device After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, and the receiving device can perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, that is, the PPDU is determined according to the first color.
  • the control frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. For details, refer to the description of the method described below.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first Color.
  • Step 1705 The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the transmitting device performs the foregoing steps, and the receiving device receives the PPDU sent by the sending device, including a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a first Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding.
  • the part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail
  • the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end
  • the second Tail is used.
  • the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the check field CRC of the receiving end.
  • Step 1706 The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
  • the receiving device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the receiving device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first color and the CRC of the Data field.
  • the receiving device receives the PPDU
  • the decoding is performed according to the traditional BCC, that is, the portion after the Tail1 is ignored.
  • the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the traditional BCC, and then transmits the 6 bits corresponding to the Color in the SERVICE and the first 4 bits (corresponding to the CRC) in the Pad bits to the MAC.
  • the MAC layer calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC.
  • the verification of Color can also be completed by the PHY of the receiving device. If the verification is correct, the PHY transmits Color to the MAC layer.
  • Step 1707 The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first Color is received correctly; if the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs step 1708.
  • Step 1708 The receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1709.
  • the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • Step 1708 can refer to step 708.
  • Step 1709 The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
  • Step 1709 can refer to step 708.
  • the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU is included There is an indication; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU.
  • the presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer.
  • the PSDU domain is far longer than the SERVICE domain, the PSDU domain is verified in the PPDU. If the PSDU domain is correctly verified, the received SERVICE domain is also correct, that is, the Color carried in the SERVICE domain is correctly received. Therefore, in an embodiment of the present application, the PPDU may not include the CRC and the Tail2. Correspondingly, the sending device may not perform step 1702, and does not need to fill the tail padding part with CRC and Tail2, and the receiving device may not perform steps. 1707.
  • the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes CRC but does not include Tail2.
  • the receiving device can verify whether Color is correctly received based on the CRC, but since there is no Tail2 after the CRC, the CRC transmission is relatively error-prone.
  • the sending device After the sending device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the sending device belongs, the sending device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a PSDU field and In the tail padding part, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the SERVICE field of the Data field includes a first color. Then, the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
  • the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the The BSS to which the receiving device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-receiving device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the receiving device Since the PHY of the receiving device does not identify the specific frame type included in the PSDU, after receiving the PPDU and decoding its SERVICE and Pad bits in the PHY layer, the receiving device can directly identify whether the first color is included by the PHY.
  • the solved bit sequence can be passed to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer identifies whether the first color is included. However, before this, some auxiliary measures can be taken to help the receiving PHY decide whether to identify the first Color or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence to the MAC layer.
  • the frame is considered to contain Color, and thus needs to be executed. Subsequent operation; if the standard stipulates that the scheme of the present application is only used for the RTS frame and the CTS/ACK frame, when the receiving PHY finds that the LENGTH field of the received PPDU physical header has a value of 14 or 20, it is considered that the frame may be Contains Color, which in turn requires subsequent operations.
  • the PPDU carrying the control frame constructed by the solution of the present application includes the presence indication, so that when the receiving device receives a PPDU, it can determine whether the PPDU is included according to the presence indication on the PPDU. Contains the first Color.
  • the presence indication may be implicit or explicit and may be included in the PHY information, such as L-SIG or SERVICE, or may be included in the MAC layer information. Specifically, the following six indication methods are included:
  • the bit sequence at the first Color position and the bit sequence at the CRC position in the PPDU may be directly indicated as the presence, that is, the transmitting device is filling the first Color and At the time of CRC, it is the padding for the presence indication.
  • the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. The specific implementation manner is that the receiving device calculates the corresponding check value CRC according to the bit sequence of the first Color corresponding position in the Pad bits of the received PPDU, and the corresponding position with the CRC. Bit sequence comparison. If the two are the same, the PPDU is considered Contains the first Color; otherwise, the frame is considered not to contain the first Color or the first Color receive error.
  • the reserved bit bearer presence indication can be used to indicate whether the first color is included in the current PPDU, as shown in FIG. 18. For example, a value of 1 indicates that the first color is included, and 0 indicates that the first color is not included. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 5) above.
  • the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the reserved bit of the transmitting device in the L-SIG in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the L-SIG in the PPDU. Whether the reserved bit has padding 1.
  • the Frame Control field is located at the beginning of the PSDU, and the Frame Control field of the control frame contains a plurality of reserved bits, such as the bits in the dotted box in FIG. Any one of the bits may be used as an indication of presence, indicating whether the first color is included in the current PPDU. For example, a value of 1 indicates that the first color is included, and 0 indicates that the color is not included. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 5) above.
  • the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit padding of the sending device in the Frame Control field in the PPDU, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the Frame Control field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit in the pad has padding 1.
  • the SERVICE field There are 9bit reserved bits in the SERVICE field. You can use any of them as the Color presence indicator to indicate whether the current PPDU includes Color. For example, a value of 1 indicates that Color is included, and 0 indicates that Color is not included. Note that since the SERVICE field itself is not verified, the SERVICE field should also include a check for the presence of the Color indicator. For example, the CRC is carried by 4 bits in the SERVICE domain as a check for the presence of Color. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 4) above.
  • the sending device fills the PPDU with the presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit of the sending device in the SERVICE field in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the SERVICE field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit has padding 1.
  • both Color (6 bits) and presence indication (1 bits) may be included in the reserved bits of the SERVICE field as shown in FIG. 20, and the first Color and presence indications
  • the CRC is carried by the Pad bits.
  • the sending device fills the PPDU with the presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit of the sending device in the SERVICE field in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the SERVICE field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit has padding 1.
  • the RA field is located in the PSDU, that is, the MAC part, and has a length of 48 bits, and is used to carry the receiving device address.
  • the highest bit of the RA indicates whether the current RA is a unicast or a multicast address (Individual/Group), as shown in FIG. 21.
  • the RA field of the control frame such as RTS, CTS, and ACK should be a unicast address, so the Individual/Group is set to 0. This scheme proposes that when the Individual/Group is set to 1, it indicates that the current PPDU contains the first Color. That is Individual/Group is 1 for presence indication.
  • the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the sending device sets the highest bit of the RA in the PPDU to 1.
  • the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, whether the receiving device determines whether the highest bit of the RA in the PPDU is 1. .
  • the presence indication may be filled, or may be filled when the PPDU is generated, or may be filled after the PPDU is generated.
  • the foregoing examples of the presence indications may be applied to the corresponding embodiments.
  • the padding of the presence indication may be filled when the sending device generates the PPDU, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the PHY of the receiving device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. In this way, the efficiency of the method for determining the BCC attribution of the control frame provided by the receiving device in the embodiment of the present application is improved.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the device may be used to perform the method performed by the receiving device in any of the foregoing embodiments 1) to 4). Referring to FIG. 22, the device is described as a second device.
  • the second device includes:
  • the acquiring unit 2201 is configured to obtain a PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding part includes a first color, where the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the first determining unit 2202 is configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • the determining unit 2203 is configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
  • the tail fill portion further includes a check field.
  • the second device further includes:
  • a second determining unit 2204 configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly
  • the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and the check field are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field.
  • the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve the receiving. BCC decoding performance of the terminal;
  • the second device further includes:
  • the decoding unit 2205 is configured to perform BCC decoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and perform Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain;
  • the third determining unit 2206 is configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
  • the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color;
  • the second device further includes:
  • the fourth determining unit 2207 is configured to determine whether the PPDU includes a presence indication.
  • the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the obtaining unit 2201 acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color.
  • the first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • the first determining unit 2202 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to belong to the second device.
  • the BSS performs identification so that if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the determining unit 2203 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 23, for the convenience of description, only the parts related to the embodiment of the present application are shown. For details of the technical details, please refer to the method part of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal may be any terminal device including a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant), a POS (Point of Sales), an in-vehicle computer, and the terminal is a mobile phone as an example:
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a partial structure of a mobile phone related to a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mobile phone includes: a radio frequency (RF) circuit 2310, a memory 2320, an input unit 2330, a display unit 2340, a sensor 2350, an audio circuit 2360, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module 2370, and a processor 2380. And power supply 2390 and other components.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the structure of the handset shown in FIG. 23 does not constitute a limitation to the handset, and may include more or less components than those illustrated, or some components may be combined, or different components may be arranged.
  • the RF circuit 2310 can be used for receiving and transmitting signals during the transmission or reception of information or during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, the processor 2380 processes the data. In addition, the uplink data is designed to be sent to the base station. Generally, RF circuit 2310 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like. In addition, RF circuitry 2310 can also communicate with the network and other devices via wireless communication. The above wireless communication may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to Global System of Mobile communication (GSM), General Packet Radio SERVICE (GPRS), Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division). Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), E-mail, Short Messaging SERVICE (SMS), and the like.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication
  • GPRS General Packet Radio SERVICE
  • the memory 2320 can be used to store software programs and modules, and the processor 2380 is stored in the memory 2320 by running. Software programs and modules to perform various functional applications and data processing of the mobile phone.
  • the memory 2320 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area, wherein the storage program area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.), and the like; the storage data area may be stored according to Data created by the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
  • the memory 2320 may include a high speed random access memory, and may also include a nonvolatile memory such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
  • the input unit 2330 can be configured to receive input numeric or character information and to generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function controls of the handset.
  • the input unit 2330 may include a touch panel 2331 and other input devices 2332.
  • the touch panel 2331 also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations on or near the user (such as a user using a finger, a stylus, or the like on the touch panel 2331 or near the touch panel 2331. Operation), and drive the corresponding connecting device according to a preset program.
  • the touch panel 2331 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, and detects a signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts the touch information into contact coordinates, and sends the touch information.
  • the processor 2380 is provided and can receive commands from the processor 2380 and execute them.
  • the touch panel 2331 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves.
  • the input unit 2330 may also include other input devices 2332.
  • other input devices 2332 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, and the like.
  • the display unit 2340 can be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user as well as various menus of the mobile phone.
  • the display unit 2340 can include a display panel 2341.
  • the display panel 2341 can be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like.
  • the touch panel 2331 may cover the display panel 2341. When the touch panel 2331 detects a touch operation on or near the touch panel 2331, the touch panel 2331 transmits to the processor 2380 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 2380 according to the touch event. The type provides a corresponding visual output on display panel 2341.
  • touch panel 2331 and the display panel 2341 are used as two independent components to implement the input and input functions of the mobile phone in FIG. 23, in some embodiments, the touch panel 2331 and the display panel 2341 may be integrated. Realize the input and output functions of the phone.
  • the handset can also include at least one type of sensor 2350, such as a light sensor, motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein the ambient light sensor may adjust the brightness of the display panel 2341 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor may close the display panel 2341 and/or when the mobile phone moves to the ear. Or backlight.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes). When it is stationary, it can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity.
  • the mobile phone can be used to identify the gesture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Game, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for the mobile phone can also be configured with gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors and other sensors, no longer Narration.
  • the gesture of the mobile phone such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Game, magnetometer attitude calibration
  • vibration recognition related functions such as pedometer, tapping
  • the mobile phone can also be configured with gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors and other sensors, no longer Narration.
  • An audio circuit 2360, a speaker 2361, and a microphone 2362 can provide an audio interface between the user and the handset.
  • the audio circuit 2360 can transmit the converted electrical data of the received audio data to the speaker 2361, and convert it into a sound signal output by the speaker 2361; on the other hand, the microphone 2362 converts the collected sound signal into an electrical signal by the audio circuit.
  • the 2360 is converted to audio data after reception, and then processed by the audio data output processor 2380, transmitted to the other mobile phone via the RF circuit 2310, or outputted to the memory 2320 for further processing.
  • WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology.
  • the mobile phone can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages and access streaming media through the WiFi module 2370. It provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • FIG. 23 shows the WiFi module 2370, it can be understood that it does not belong to the essential configuration of the mobile phone, and may be omitted as needed within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
  • the processor 2380 is the control center of the handset, which connects various portions of the entire handset using various interfaces and lines, by executing or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 2320, and invoking data stored in the memory 2320, The phone's various functions and processing data, so that the overall monitoring of the phone.
  • the processor 2380 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 2380 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor mainly processes an operating system, a user interface, an application, and the like.
  • the modem processor primarily handles wireless communications. It will be appreciated that the above described modem processor may also not be integrated into the processor 2380.
  • the mobile phone also includes a power source 2390 (such as a battery) for powering various components.
  • a power source 2390 such as a battery
  • the power source can be logically coupled to the processor 2380 through a power management system to manage functions such as charging, discharging, and power management through the power management system.
  • the mobile phone may further include a camera, a Bluetooth module, and the like, and details are not described herein again.
  • the hardware structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 23 may also be the hardware structure of the base station.
  • the device shown in FIG. 23 can integrate the functional modules of the above-described configuration shown in FIG. 22, and the device shown in FIG. 23 can also be used to perform the steps of the corresponding devices of any of the above embodiments 1) to 4).
  • the RF circuit 2310 is one of the specific forms of the transceiver, and the transceiver and the processor 2380 included in the device also have the following functions:
  • the transceiver has the following functions:
  • the PPDU includes a Data field
  • the Data field includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part
  • the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail
  • the padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the processor 2380 has the following functions:
  • the tail padding portion further includes a check field.
  • the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following functions:
  • the processor 2380 performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and the check field are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field.
  • the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve the receiving. BCC decoding performance at the end.
  • the processor 2380 Before the processor determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following functions:
  • the central processing unit 2380 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and before the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following function: determining whether the PPDU is The presence indication is included; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the processor 2380 performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the transceiver acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes the Data field, the Data field includes the physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and the tail padding part, and the PSDU field includes the control frame and the tail.
  • the padding portion includes a first color, the first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs, and then the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used for the first color.
  • the BSS to which the two devices belong is identified, so that if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the processor 2380 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the device may be used to perform the function of the receiving device in the foregoing embodiment 5).
  • the device in the embodiment of the present application is The second device is described,
  • the second device includes:
  • the obtaining unit 2401 is configured to obtain a PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail.
  • the padding part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
  • the first determining unit 2402 is configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
  • the second determining unit 2403 is configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same if the first color is received correctly, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • a determining unit 2404 if the first color and the second color are the same, determining that the control frame is from the second device The BSS to which it belongs.
  • the tail padding part includes the first tail information Tail, the check field and the second Tail in sequence, the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the check field of the receiving end. BCC decoding performance.
  • the PPDU further includes an presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color
  • the second device further includes:
  • the third determining unit 2405 is configured to determine whether the PPDU includes a presence indication.
  • the second determination unit 2403 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the obtaining unit 2401 acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, and the SERVICE domain includes a first color, and the PSDU domain includes The control frame, the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly. Then, the first determining unit 2402 determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field.
  • the second determining unit 2403 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. Thus, if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the determining unit 2404 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the device for determining the BSS ownership of the present application has another embodiment.
  • a schematic structural diagram of the device reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
  • the device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 24, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the receiving device in the foregoing embodiment 5).
  • the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
  • the transceiver has the following functions:
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a first color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field, and the first color is used for the first device.
  • the associated BSS performs identification, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly;
  • the processor has the following functions:
  • the first color is received correctly, it is determined whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color Used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail.
  • the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end
  • the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and the processor determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor further has the following functions:
  • the processor performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  • the transceiver acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes the Data field, the Data field includes the SERVICE domain, the PSDU domain, and the tail padding part, the SERVICE domain includes the first Color, and the PSDU domain includes the control.
  • the frame, the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
  • the processor determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the processor determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the central processor determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in Fig. 25 can be used to perform the functions of the transmitting device in any of the above embodiments 1) to 4).
  • the first device includes:
  • the obtaining unit 2501 is configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • a generating unit 2502 configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
  • the sending unit 2503 is configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
  • the first device further includes:
  • a first field generating unit 2504 configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
  • the generating unit 2502 is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field.
  • the tail padding part further includes tail information Tail, the Color and check fields are located after the Tail, or the Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the first device further includes a second field generating unit 2505 and an encoding unit 2506;
  • a second field generating unit 2505, configured to generate a check field according to Color
  • the generating unit 2502 is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where a tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field.
  • the check field and the Color are located after the tail information Tail, and the Color is located Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the encoding unit 2506 is configured to perform BCC encoding on the Tail portion and the Tail portion in the Data domain, and perform Tail-biting BCC encoding on the portion after the Tail in the Data domain.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the obtaining unit 2501 obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the generating unit 2502 generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color. Next, the transmitting unit 2503 transmits a PPDU to the second device. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color. The pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs.
  • the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs.
  • the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the device for transmitting a control frame of the present application has another embodiment.
  • a schematic structural diagram of the device reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
  • the device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 25, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the sending device in the foregoing embodiments 1) to 4).
  • the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
  • the processor has the following functions:
  • Obtaining Color, Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
  • the transceiver has the following functions:
  • the processor has the following functions:
  • a PPDU carrying a control frame is generated according to the Color and the check field, and the tail padding portion of the PPDU further includes a check field.
  • the tail padding part further includes tail information Tail, the Color and check fields are located after the Tail, or the Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  • the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  • the processor has the following functions:
  • a PPDU carrying a control frame is generated according to the Color and check fields.
  • the tail padding part of the PPDU includes a check field.
  • the check field and Color are located after the tail information Tail, and the Color is located at the end of the tail padding part, Tail Used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the processor obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the processor generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color.
  • the transceiver then sends a PPDU to the second device. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU and the pre-stored color are the same.
  • the pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored Colorr, Then, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus shown in Fig. 26 can be used to perform the functions of the transmitting apparatus of the above embodiment 5).
  • the device in this embodiment is described as a first device, where the first device includes:
  • the obtaining unit 2601 is configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs.
  • a field generating unit 2602 configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
  • the generating unit 2603 is configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding Part includes the check field;
  • the sending unit 2604 is configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail.
  • the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end
  • the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the obtaining unit 2601 acquires Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the field generating unit 2602 generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is correctly received. And, the generating unit 2603 generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail. The padding section includes a check field. Then, the sending unit 2604 goes to the second device Send a PPDU.
  • the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, and the pre-stored color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, The second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities.
  • the color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
  • the device for transmitting a control frame of the present application has another embodiment.
  • a schematic structural diagram of the device reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
  • the device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 26, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the sending device in the foregoing embodiment 5).
  • the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
  • the processor has the following functions:
  • Obtaining Color, Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
  • the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field.
  • the transceiver has the following functions:
  • the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail.
  • the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end
  • the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
  • the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
  • the processor obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the processor generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly. And, the processor generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding Part includes the check field.
  • the transceiver sends a PPDU to the second device.
  • the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color.
  • the pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, Then, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. And set the Color to the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field.
  • the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and constant transmission overhead.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system.
  • the architecture of the communication system may refer to the architecture diagram shown in FIG. 1.
  • the communication system includes a first device and a second device,
  • the first device is a transmitting device, which is shown in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the first device is a transmitting device, which is shown in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the for details refer to the foregoing exemplary embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the second device is the receiving device shown in any of the foregoing embodiments, which is described in detail in the foregoing exemplary embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • wire eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be stored by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).

Abstract

Provided by the embodiments of the present application are a method for determining BSS attribution, a method for sending a control frame and a related device, which are used for aiding a receiving terminal in determining the BSS to which a control frame belongs. The method of the embodiments of the present application comprises: a second device acquiring a PLCP protocol data unit (PPDU) carrying a control frame which is sent by a first device, the PPDU comprising a first color, and the first color being used to identify a basic service set (BSS) to which the first device belongs; the second device determining whether the first color is the same as a pre-stored second color, the second color being used for identifying the BSS to which the second device belongs; and the second device determining that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color is the same as the second color. Thus, the device may effectively distinguish control frames sent using a PPDU format by means of color comparison so as to execute a corresponding operation according to the BSS to which the control frames belong.

Description

确定BSS归属的方法、发送控制帧的方法和相关设备Method for determining BSS attribution, method for transmitting control frame, and related device
本申请要求于2016年11月3日提交中国专利局、申请号为201610953030.3,发明名称为“一种区分控制帧BSS归属的方法设备”的中国专利申请优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims to be filed on November 3, 2016, the Chinese Patent Office, the application number is 201610953030.3, and the invention is entitled "a method and device for distinguishing control frame BSS attribution", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In the application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种确定BSS归属的方法、发送控制帧的方法、确定BSS归属的设备和发送控制帧的设备。The present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method for determining a BSS attribution, a method for transmitting a control frame, a device for determining a BSS attribution, and a device for transmitting a control frame.
背景技术Background technique
802.11标准的媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)帧可分为数据帧、管理帧、控制帧三大类。其中,部分控制帧的MAC头地址域中可能不包含基本服务集标识(Basic SERVICE Set Identifier,BSSID)。例如,对于请求发送(Request to Send,RTS)、清除发送(Clear to Send,CTS)等帧,其MAC头地址域中可能不包含BSSID。具体来说,对于CTS和确认(Acknowledge,ACK)帧,由于MAC头中只有接收机地址(Receiver Address,RA)域,故当用于下行(Downlink,DL)传输和直连链路建立(Direct-link Setup;DLS)/隧道直连链路建立(Tunneled Direct-link Setup,TDLS)传输时,RA域不包含BSSID;而对于RTS、块确认(Block Acknowledge,BA)和块确认请求(Block Acknowledge Request,BAR)帧,其MAC头中有RA和发射机地址(Transmitter Address,TA)两个地址域,当用于DLS/TDLS传输时,RA域和TA域都不包含BSSID。DLS/TDLS传输是指同一接入点(Access Point,AP)关联的两个站点(Station,STA)之间的传输,RA域和TA域分别为收发双方的地址,显然不包含BSSID。另外,RTS、CTS等控制帧主要作用在于传输保护,旧有(legacy)设备也应能够接收,因此,这些控制帧不能采用HE PPDU格式传输,而只能使用legacy PPDU格式传输,即无法通过物理头包括Color(颜色)来指示基本服务集(Basic SERVICE Set,BSS)归属。所谓legacy PPDU格式,即802.11a/g标准提出的基于正交频分复用(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing,OFDM)的PLCP协议数据单元(PLCP protocol data unit,PPDU)格式,其中,PLCP服务数据单元(PLCP SERVICE data unit,PSDU)即MAC帧。Legacy PPDU又称为non-HT PPDU。HT即High Throughput(高吞吐量)。PLCP即Physical Layer Convergence Procedure(物理层汇聚过程)。HE PPDU格式即802.11ax标准提出的PPDU格式,其物理头中包含Color,用来指示发送此PPDU的设备所属的BSS的标识,相当于BSSID的简化表示。The medium access control (MAC) frame of the 802.11 standard can be divided into three categories: data frame, management frame, and control frame. The MAC header address field of the part of the control frame may not include a Basic SERVICE Set Identifier (BSSID). For example, for a frame such as Request to Send (RTS) or Clear to Send (CTS), the BSSID may not be included in the MAC header address field. Specifically, for CTS and Acknowledge (ACK) frames, since there are only Receiver Address (RA) fields in the MAC header, it is used for Downlink (DL) transmission and Direct Link Establishment (Direct). -link Setup; DLS)/Tunneled Direct-Link Setup (TDLS) transmission, the RA domain does not contain the BSSID; and for RTS, Block Acknowledge (BA) and Block Acknowledge (Block Acknowledge) The Request, BAR) frame has two address fields: RA and Transmitter Address (TA) in the MAC header. When used for DLS/TDLS transmission, neither the RA domain nor the TA domain contain the BSSID. The DLS/TDLS transmission refers to the transmission between two stations (Stations, STAs) associated with the same access point (AP). The RA domain and the TA domain are the addresses of the transmitting and receiving parties respectively, and obviously do not contain the BSSID. In addition, control frames such as RTS and CTS are mainly used for transmission protection, and legacy devices should also be able to receive. Therefore, these control frames cannot be transmitted in the HE PPDU format, but can only be transmitted using the legacy PPDU format, that is, cannot pass physical. The header includes Color to indicate the base of the Basic Service Set (BSS). The so-called legacy PPDU format, which is a PLCP protocol data unit (PPDU) format based on Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) proposed by the 802.11a/g standard, where the PLCP service data unit ( PLCP SERVICE data unit, PSDU) is the MAC frame. Legacy PPDUs are also known as non-HT PPDUs. HT is High Throughput. PLCP is the Physical Layer Convergence Procedure. The HE PPDU format is the PPDU format proposed by the 802.11ax standard. The physical header contains Color, which is used to indicate the identifier of the BSS to which the device transmitting the PPDU belongs, which is equivalent to a simplified representation of the BSSID.
由于RTS、CTS、ACK、BA、BAR的MAC头中不包含BSSID,且无法通过物理头承载Color,其中Color用于对发送控制帧的设备所属的BSS进行标识。故当STA收到这样的一个控制帧且其地址域中不包含该STA所属BSS的BSSID时,STA并不能确定这个帧是否是来自本BSS设备的控制帧。若STA并不能确定接收到的控制帧是否是来自本BSS的设备,将会导致STA的一些操作产生错误。 The BSS ID is not included in the MAC header of the RTS, CTS, ACK, BA, and BAR, and the color cannot be carried by the physical header. The Color is used to identify the BSS to which the device that sends the control frame belongs. Therefore, when the STA receives such a control frame and its address field does not include the BSSID of the BSS to which the STA belongs, the STA cannot determine whether the frame is a control frame from the BSS device. If the STA is not sure whether the received control frame is a device from the BSS, it will cause some errors in the operation of the STA.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种确定BSS归属的方法、发送控制帧的方法和确定BSS归属的设备和发送控制帧的设备,用于方便接收端确定出控制帧归属的BSS。An embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, a method for transmitting a control frame, and a device for determining a BSS attribution and a device for transmitting a control frame, where the receiving end determines a BSS to which the control frame belongs.
本发明实施例的第一方面提供一种确定BSS归属的方法,该方法包括:第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识。然后,第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,该第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识。第二Color可预先存储在第二设备的存储模块上。若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。若第一Color和第二Color不相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。从而,第二设备根据控制帧的不同归属的BSS,可执行不同的操作。例如,若该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS,则第二设备可以根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV,或者,第二设备根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,释放intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV。A first aspect of the present invention provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, where the method includes: acquiring, by a second device, a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, The Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. The second Color may be pre-stored on the storage module of the second device. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are not the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. Thus, the second device can perform different operations according to different BSSs of the control frame. For example, if the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs, the second device may set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not affect the regular-NAV, or the second device carries according to the control frame. CF-End, release intra-NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV.
这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作。其中,该PPDU格式可以为legacy PPDU格式。例如,接受控制帧的设备可根据控制帧的归属设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。Thus, by comparing Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform the corresponding operation according to the home BSS of the control frame. The PPDU format can be a legacy PPDU format. For example, a device that accepts a control frame can set a correct NAV according to the attribution of the control frame, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
结合本申请实施例的第一方面,在本申请实施例的第一方面的第一种实现方式中,尾填充部分还包括校验字段,该校验字段例如可以为奇偶校验码、循环冗余编码等。第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,本实现方式还包括:第二设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则第二设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。通过校验字段第二设备可验证对应的第一Color是否接收正确。校验字段的设置可提高传输的Color的可靠性,而校验字段设在尾填充部分也可以避免增加传输开销。With reference to the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the first aspect of the application, the tail padding part further includes a check field, where the check field may be, for example, a parity code and a loop redundancy. I code and so on. Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the implementation further includes: the second device determining, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly. If the first Color is received correctly, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. The second device can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly by the check field. The setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead.
结合本申请实施例的第一方面的第一种实现方式,本申请实施例的第一方面的第二种实现方式中,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。第一Color和校验字段在该PPDU中有多种具体的设置位置,例如,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,即第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后的尾填充部分,这样可以充分利用Tail之后的填充比特Pad bits,以及不影响Tail。或者,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,当解码器不利用Tail的已知序列进行辅助译码时,Tail这样设置,不影响接收端的译码性能,且还能保证第一Color和校验字段的有效传输。With reference to the first implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in the second implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, and the Tail is used to improve BCC decoding at the receiving end. performance. The first Color and check fields have a plurality of specific setting positions in the PPDU. For example, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, that is, the first Color and the check field are located at the tail padding portion after the Tail, so that Make full use of the padding bits after the Tail, and do not affect the Tail. Alternatively, the first Color and check fields are located before the Tail. When the decoder does not use the known sequence of Tail for auxiliary decoding, the Tail is set such that the decoding performance of the receiving end is not affected, and the first Color and the calibration are also guaranteed. Valid transmission of the field.
结合本申请实施例的第一方面或者第一方面的第一种或第二种实现方式,本申请实施例的第一方面的第三种实现方式中,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。 With reference to the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first or second implementation manner of the first aspect, in the third implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the end of the tail padding portion further includes remaining padding bits. Pad, Pad is an all-zero sequence.
在尾填充部分中填充第一Color或者填充第一Color和校验字段之后,还剩下剩余填充比特时,因原填充比特Pad bits是全零序列,从而将该剩余填充比特Pad定为全零序列,可减少对尾填充部分的改动,在收发两端,以该Pad为已知序列时,接收端可以将Pad视为Tail进行译码,有利于增加数据尾部比特的译码正确概率。After the first color is filled in the tail padding portion or the first color and the check field are filled, when the remaining padding bits remain, since the original padding bits Pad bits are all zero sequences, the remaining padding bits Pad are determined as an all-zero sequence. The modification of the tail padding portion can be reduced. When the Pad is a known sequence at the transmitting and receiving ends, the receiving end can decode the Pad as a Tail, which is advantageous for increasing the decoding probability of the data tail bits.
结合本申请实施例的第一方面,本申请实施例的第一方面的第四种实现方式中,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail和校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和第一Color位于Tail之后,且第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,其中,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,本实现方式的方法还包括:第二设备对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码。并且为了验证第一Color是否接收正确,从而提高方法实现的可靠性,第二设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;若第一Color接收正确,则第二设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。With reference to the first aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fourth implementation manner of the first aspect of the application, the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail and a check field, and in the tail padding part, the check field and the first A Color is located after the Tail, and the first Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion, where Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end. Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method of the implementation manner further includes: performing, by the second device, BCC decoding on the Tail portion and the Tail portion in the Data domain, and in the Data domain The part after Tail performs Tail-biting BCC decoding. And in order to verify whether the first color is received correctly, thereby improving the reliability of the method implementation, the second device determines whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field; if the first color is received correctly, the second device performs determining the first color and The pre-stored second color is the same step.
结合本申请实施例的第一方面或者第一种或第二种实现方式,本申请实施例的第一方面的第五种实现方式中,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color。第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,本实现方式的方法还包括:第二设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示。若PPDU包括存在指示,则第二设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。通过该存在指示的提示,使得第二设备的PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层以进行识别。这样可提高本实现方式的方法的执行效率。With reference to the first aspect or the first or second implementation manner of the embodiment of the present application, in a fifth implementation manner of the first aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first A Color. Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method of the implementation manner further includes: determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. By the prompt of the presence indication, the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. This can improve the execution efficiency of the method of the present implementation.
本申请实施例的第二方面提供一种确定BSS归属的方法,该方法包括:第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,该校验字段例如可以为奇偶校验码、循环冗余编码等。第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。A second aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution, where the method includes: the second device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a SERVICE domain and a PSDU. The field and tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a first color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field, which may be, for example, a parity code, a cyclic redundancy code, or the like. The first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
然后,第二设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,其中,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识。若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。若第一Color和第二Color不相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。从而,第二设备根据控制帧的不同归属的BSS,可执行不同的操作,例如,若该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS,则第二设备可以根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV,或者,第二设备根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,释放intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV。而通过校验字段第二设备可验证对应的第一Color是否接收正确。校验字段的设置可提高传输的Color的可靠性,而校验字段设在尾填充部分也可以避免增加传输开销。Then, the second device determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, wherein the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first Color and the second Color are not the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. Therefore, the second device may perform different operations according to different BSSs of the control frame. For example, if the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs, the second device may set intra according to the duration carried by the control frame. NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV, or the second device releases intra-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame, but does not affect regular-NAV. And the second device through the check field can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly. The setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead.
这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE 域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. And set Color to the tail padding part of the PPDU or SERVICE The domain makes the PPDU feature backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
结合本申请实施例的第二方面,在本申请实施例的第二方面的第一种实现方式中,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。With reference to the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the tail padding portion includes the first tail information Tail, the check field, and the second Tail in sequence, and the first Tail is used. To improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end, the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end.
结合本申请实施例的第二方面或者第二方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第二方面的第二种实现方式中,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color。第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,本实现方式的方法还包括:第二设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示。若PPDU包括存在指示,则第二设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。通过该存在指示的提示,使得第二设备的PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层以进行识别。这样可提高本实现方式的方法的执行效率。With reference to the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first implementation manner of the second aspect, in a second implementation manner of the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU is included First Color. Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method of the implementation manner further includes: determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. By the prompt of the presence indication, the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. This can improve the execution efficiency of the method of the present implementation.
本申请实施例的第三方面提供一种发送控制帧的方法,该方法包括:第一设备获取Color,该Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,第一设备根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,生成的PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,在PSDU域中包括控制帧,而尾填充部分包括该Color。从而,第一设备可向第二设备发送该PPDU。A third aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a method for sending a control frame, where the method includes: acquiring, by a first device, a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the generated PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the control frame is included in the PSDU domain, and the tail padding portion includes the Color. Thus, the first device can transmit the PPDU to the second device.
这样,因该PPDU包括Color,第二设备即可根据该PPDU上的Color和第二设备所属BSS的Color进行比较,以使得第二设备根据比较结果可确定出该PPDU上的控制帧的来源。In this way, because the PPDU includes Color, the second device can compare according to the Color on the PPDU and the Color of the BSS to which the second device belongs, so that the second device can determine the source of the control frame on the PPDU according to the comparison result.
这样,发送设备发送的PPDU携带有Color后,接受该PPDU的设备通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作。其中,该PPDU格式可以为legacy PPDU格式。例如,接受控制帧的设备可根据控制帧的归属设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In this way, after the PPDU sent by the sending device carries the Color, the device that accepts the PPDU compares the Colors, and the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame. The PPDU format can be a legacy PPDU format. For example, a device that accepts a control frame can set a correct NAV according to the attribution of the control frame, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
结合本申请实施例的第三方面,在本申请实施例的第三方面的第一种实现方式中,第一设备向第二设备发送PPDU之前,方法还包括:第一设备根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;该校验字段可通过算法根据Color生成,检验字段有多种形式,例如可以是循环冗余编码CRC、奇偶校验字段等。从而,第一设备根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:第一设备根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU的尾填充部分包括校验字段。这样,接收该PPDU的设备可以根据该校验字段验证该Color是否接收正确,这样提高了Color的传输可靠性。With reference to the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the third aspect of the application, before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method further includes: the first device generates a check according to the color. The field, the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly; the check field can be generated according to Color by an algorithm, and the check field has various forms, such as a cyclic redundancy coded CRC, a parity field, and the like. Therefore, the first device generates the PPDU carrying the control frame according to the color, and the first device generates the PPDU carrying the control frame according to the Color and the check field, and the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes the check field. In this way, the device receiving the PPDU can verify whether the Color is received correctly according to the check field, which improves the transmission reliability of the Color.
结合本申请实施例的第三方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第三方面的第二种实现方式中,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Color和校验字段在该PPDU中有多种具体的设置位置,例如,Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,这样可以充分利用Tail之后的填充比特Pad bits,以及不影响Tail。或者,Color和校验字 段位于Tail之前,解码器不利用Tail的已知序列进行辅助译码时,Tail这样设置,不影响接收端的译码性能,且还能保证第一Color和校验字段的有效传输。With reference to the first implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in the second implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC translation of the receiving end. Code performance. The Color and Check fields have various specific setting positions in the PPDU. For example, the Color and Check fields are located after the Tail, so that the padding bits after the Tail can be fully utilized, and the Tail is not affected. Or, Color and check word Before the segment is located before the Tail, the decoder does not use the known sequence of Tail for auxiliary decoding. The Tail is set such that it does not affect the decoding performance of the receiving end, and can also ensure the effective transmission of the first Color and the check field.
结合本申请实施例的第三方面、或者第三方面的第一种或第二种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第三方面的第三种实现方式中,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。在尾填充部分中,填充Color或者填充Color和校验字段之后,还剩下剩余填充比特时,因原填充比特Pad bits是全零序列,从而将该剩余填充比特Pad定为全零序列,可减少对尾填充部分的改动,在收发两端,以该Pad为已知序列时,接收端可以将Pad视为Tail进行译码,有利于增加数据尾部比特的译码正确概率。With reference to the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, or the first or second implementation manner of the third aspect, in the third implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the end of the tail-filling portion further includes the remaining The padding Pad, Pad is an all-zero sequence. In the tail padding part, after the Color is filled or the Color and Check fields are filled, when the remaining padding bits remain, since the original padding bits Pad bits are all zero sequences, the remaining padding bits Pad are set to the all-zero sequence, which can be reduced. For the modification of the tail-filled part, when the Pad is a known sequence at the transmitting and receiving ends, the receiving end can decode the Pad as a Tail, which is beneficial to increase the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits.
结合本申请实施例的第三方面,在本申请实施例的第三方面的第四种实现方式中,第一设备向第二设备发送PPDU之前,本实现方式的方法还包括:第一设备根据Color生成校验字段。第一设备根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:第一设备根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,其中PPDU的尾填充部分还包括校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。这样,在接收端,可根据该校验字段对Color验证是否接收正确。然后,第一设备对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC编码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。以提高Data域的传输可靠性,并且通过使用Tail-biting BCC编码可以减少与Color和CRC相应的尾信息,使得尾填充部分不用填充过多的数据。With reference to the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fourth implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method of the implementation manner further includes: the first device according to the first device Color generates a check field. The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, where the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the tail padding portion of the PPDU further includes a check field, and in the tail padding part, the check The field and Color are located after the tail information Tail, and Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion. Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end. Thus, at the receiving end, Color can be verified to be correctly received according to the check field. Then, the first device performs BCC encoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC encoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain. In order to improve the transmission reliability of the Data domain, and by using Tail-biting BCC encoding, the tail information corresponding to Color and CRC can be reduced, so that the tail padding portion does not need to fill too much data.
结合本申请实施例的第三方面、以及第三方面的第一种或第二种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第三方面的第五种实现方式中,PPDU还包括存在指示,该存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。通过存在指示可以辅助接收端判断该PPDU是否包括Color,使得接受该PPDU的第二设备的PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层以进行识别。从而提高该接收端的执行的效率。With reference to the third aspect of the embodiments of the present application, and the first or second implementation manner of the third aspect, in a fifth implementation manner of the third aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, the existence The indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color. The presence indicator can assist the receiving end to determine whether the PPDU includes Color, so that the PHY of the second device accepting the PPDU determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for performing. Identification. Thereby improving the efficiency of execution of the receiving end.
本申请实施例的第四方面提供一种发送控制帧的方法,该方法包括:第一设备获取Color,其中,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,第一设备根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确,该校验字段例如可以为奇偶校验码、循环冗余编码等。第一设备根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,该PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段。从而,第一设备可向第二设备发送该PPDU。A fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a method for sending a control frame, where the method includes: acquiring, by a first device, a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is correctly received, and the check field may be, for example, a parity code, a cyclic redundancy code, or the like. The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to a Color and a check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes Check the field. Thus, the first device can transmit the PPDU to the second device.
这样,第二设备即可根据该PPDU上的Color和第二设备所属BSS的Color进行比较,以使得第二设备可确定出该PPDU上的控制帧的来源。而通过校验字段第二设备可验证对应的第一Color是否接收正确。校验字段的设置可提高传输的Color的可靠性,而校验字段设在尾填充部分也可以避免增加传输开销。通过Color的比较,接受该PPDU的设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作。其中,该PPDU格式例如可以为legacy PPDU格式。例如,接受PPDU的设备可根据Color的比较结果设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输 机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In this way, the second device can compare according to the Color on the PPDU and the Color of the BSS to which the second device belongs, so that the second device can determine the source of the control frame on the PPDU. And the second device through the check field can verify whether the corresponding first color is received correctly. The setting of the check field can improve the reliability of the transmitted Color, and the check field is set in the tail padding part to avoid increasing the transmission overhead. By comparing Color, the device accepting the PPDU can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform the corresponding operation according to the home BSS of the control frame. The PPDU format may be, for example, a legacy PPDU format. For example, a device that accepts a PPDU can set a correct NAV according to the comparison result of Color, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoids interference, and increases device signal transmission. opportunity. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
结合本申请实施例的第四方面,在本申请实施例的第四方面的第一种实现方式中,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。With reference to the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the tail padding part includes the first tail information Tail, the check field, and the second Tail, and the first Tail is used. To improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end, the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end.
结合本申请实施例的第四方面或第四方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第四方面的第二种实现方式中,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。这样,通过存在指示可以辅助接收端判断该PPDU是否包括Color,使得第二设备的PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层以进行识别。从而提高该接收端的执行本实现方式的方法的效率。With reference to the fourth aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first implementation manner of the fourth aspect, in a second implementation manner of the fourth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU is included Color. In this way, the presence indicator can assist the receiving end to determine whether the PPDU includes Color, so that the PHY of the second device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. Thereby improving the efficiency of the method of performing the present implementation at the receiving end.
本申请实施例的第五方面提供一种确定BSS归属的设备,该设备具有上述方法中确定BSS归属的第二设备的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可能通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。该设备为第二设备。A fifth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a device for determining a BSS attribution, where the device has the function of determining a second device to which a BSS belongs in the foregoing method. This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The device is a second device.
一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In a possible implementation, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
获取单元,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;The acquiring unit is configured to obtain a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, and the PSDU domain includes a control a frame, the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
第一判断单元,用于判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;a first determining unit, configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
确定单元,用于若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。And a determining unit, configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In another possible implementation manner, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
收发器,处理器;Transceiver
该收发器执行如下动作:获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;The transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, and a PSDU domain. Including a control frame, the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
该处理器执行如下动作:判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;The processor performs the following actions: determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
该处理器执行如下动作:若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。The processor performs the following actions: if the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第一方面的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing first aspect is performed.
本申请实施例的第七方面提供一种确定BSS归属的设备,该设备具有上述方法中确定BSS归属的第二设备的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可能通过硬件执行相应的软件 实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。该设备为第二设备。A seventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides a device for determining a BSS attribution, where the device has the function of determining a second device to which a BSS belongs in the foregoing method. This function can be implemented in hardware or executed by hardware. achieve. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The device is a second device.
一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In a possible implementation, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
获取单元,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确;An acquiring unit, configured to obtain a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding The part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly;
第一判断单元,用于基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;a first determining unit, configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
第二判断单元,用于若第一Color接收正确,则判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;a second determining unit, configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same if the first color is received correctly, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
确定单元,用于若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。And a determining unit, configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In another possible implementation manner, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
收发器,处理器;Transceiver
该收发器执行如下动作:获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确;The transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame. The tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly;
该处理器执行如下动作:基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;The processor performs the following actions: determining whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
该处理器执行如下动作:若第一Color接收正确,则判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;The processor performs the following actions: if the first color is received correctly, determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
该处理器执行如下动作:若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。The processor performs the following actions: if the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第二方面的方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the second aspect is performed.
本申请实施例的第九方面提供一种发送控制帧的设备,该设备具有上述方法中发送控制帧的第一设备的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可能通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。该设备为第一设备。A ninth aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a control frame, where the apparatus has the function of a first device that transmits a control frame in the foregoing method. This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The device is a first device.
一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In a possible implementation, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
获取单元,用于获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;An obtaining unit, configured to acquire a color, and the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
生成单元,用于根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color;a generating unit, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
发送单元,用于向第二设备发送PPDU。And a sending unit, configured to send a PPDU to the second device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In another possible implementation manner, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
收发器,处理器;Transceiver
该收发器执行如下动作:获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
该处理器执行如下动作:根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color; The processor performs the following actions: generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
该收发器执行如下动作:向第二设备发送PPDU。The transceiver performs the following actions: transmitting a PPDU to the second device.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第三方面的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, where the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing third aspect is performed.
本申请实施例的第十一方面提供一种发送控制帧的设备,该设备具有上述方法中发送控制帧的第一设备的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可能通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。该设备为第一设备。An eleventh aspect of the embodiments of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a control frame, where the apparatus has the function of a first device that sends a control frame in the foregoing method. This function can be implemented in hardware or in hardware by executing the corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above. The device is a first device.
一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In a possible implementation, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
获取单元,用于获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;An obtaining unit, configured to acquire a color, and the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
字段生成单元,用于根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;a field generating unit, configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
生成单元,用于根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段;And a generating unit, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail padding part. Including the check field;
发送单元,用于向第二设备发送PPDU。And a sending unit, configured to send a PPDU to the second device.
另一种可能的实现方式中,该确定BSS归属的设备包括:In another possible implementation manner, the determining the device to which the BSS belongs includes:
收发器,处理器;Transceiver
该收发器执行如下动作:获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The transceiver performs the following actions: acquiring Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
该处理器执行如下动作:根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;The processor performs the following actions: generating a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly;
该处理器执行如下动作:根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段;The processor performs the following actions: generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to a Color and a check field, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail. The padding portion includes a check field;
该收发器执行如下动作:向第二设备发送PPDU。The transceiver performs the following actions: transmitting a PPDU to the second device.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第四方面的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer storage medium, where the program storage code stores a program code, and the program code is used to indicate that the method of the foregoing fourth aspect is performed.
本申请的第十三方面提供了一种判定接收到的控制帧的BSS归属的方法,所述方法包括:A thirteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the method comprising:
第一设备接收第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述尾填充部分包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color和第一尾信息Tail,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后;The first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the tail padding part includes the BSS of the second device. Color and first tail information Tail, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
第一设备根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述第一设备所属的BSS。The first device determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
通过在legacy PPDU的Pad bits中携带Color,使得第三方新设备可获得该Color,并根据Color确定该PPDU是否来自第三方新设备所述BSS,进而设置正确的NAV,使双NAV机制更加有效;同时,由于Color携带在Pad bits中,故不影响第三方legacy设备对该PPDU中PSDU部分的接收。By carrying Color in the Pad bits of the legacy PPDU, the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第一种实现方式中, 所述第一尾信息Tail紧随于所述PSDU之后,所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:With reference to the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, After the first tail information Tail is followed by the PSDU, the first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, and includes:
所述第一设备对所述Data域进行BCC译码;或者,Decoding, by the first device, the BCC of the Data domain; or
所述第一设备对所述SERVICE域、所述PSDU和所述第一尾信息Tail进行BCC译码,对所述Data域中位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting译码。The first device performs BCC decoding on the SERVICE domain, the PSDU, and the first tail information Tail, and performs Tail-biting decoding on a portion of the Data domain that is located after the first tail information Tail. .
Tail的位置紧随PSDU,即与legacy PPDU完全相同,使得Color的引入对第三方legacy设备接收PSDU部分完全没有影响。整个Data域采用BCC编码,有利于简化收发端处理,但由于Pad bits承载能力有限,Color的可靠性降低;而Pad bits部分采用Tail-biting BCC编码,能够有效提高Color的可靠性,但收发端复杂度随之升高。The location of the Tail follows the PSDU, which is exactly the same as the legacy PPDU, so that the introduction of Color has no effect on the third-party legacy device receiving the PSDU part. The entire Data field adopts BCC coding, which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver. However, due to the limited capacity of the Pad bits, the reliability of the Color is reduced. The Pad bits part uses the Tail-biting BCC code, which can effectively improve the reliability of the Color, but the transceiver. The complexity increases.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第二种实现方式中,所述第一尾信息Tail位于所述Color之后,所述第一设备接收所述第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:With reference to the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a second implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, after the first tail information Tail is located in the color, the first device receives the The PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device includes:
所述第一设备对所述Data域进行BCC译码。The first device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
Tail移到Color之后,可能影响第三方legacy设备对PSDU部分的接收,但Color具有与PSDU部分等同的可靠性。After Tail is moved to Color, it may affect the reception of the PSDU part by the third party legacy device, but Color has the same reliability as the PSDU part.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面或第十三方面的第一种或第二种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第三种实现方式中,所述尾填充部分还包括第一校验字段,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color的校验。In a third implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, A first check field is included, the first check field being at least a checksum of the Color.
第一校验字段的引入,使得Color接收正确与否可被验证。The introduction of the first check field enables the correct reception of Color to be verified.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面或第十三方面的第一种至第三种实现方式中的任一种,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第四种实现方式中,所述PPDU中包括Color存在指示,用于指示所述PPDU中包括所述Color。With reference to the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first to third implementation manners of the thirteenth aspect, in the fourth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, The PPDU includes a color presence indication for indicating that the color is included in the PPDU.
Color存在指示的引入,使得第三方新设备可确定当前PPDU中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要从Pad bits中去获取Color。The introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第五种实现方式中,所述PPDU中还包括前导域Preamble,所述前导域Preamble位于所述Data域之前,所述Color存在指示位于所述前导域Preamble中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fifth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect, the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
Color存在指示放在Preamble中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第六种实现方式中,所述Color存在指示位于所述SERVICE域中,所示SERVICE域中包括第二校验字段,所述第二校验字段是对所述Color存在指示的校验。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in a sixth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the SERVICE is displayed. The domain includes a second check field, which is a check indicating the presence of the Color.
利用SERVICE域承载Color存在指示和第二校验字段,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication and the second check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的 第七种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括帧控制域,所述Color存在指示位于所述帧控制域中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in the thirteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application In a seventh implementation manner, the PSDU includes a frame control field, and the Color presence indication is located in the frame control domain.
Color存在指示放在MAC层帧控制域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第八种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括接收地址域,所述Color存在指示位于所述接收地址域中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in the eighth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
Color存在指示放在MAC层RA域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十三方面,在本申请实施例的第十三方面的第九种实现方式中,所述第一设备根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述第一设备所属的BSS,包括:With reference to the thirteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a ninth implementation manner of the thirteenth aspect of the present application, the first device determines, according to the color, whether the control frame is from the first The BSS to which the device belongs includes:
当所述Color与所述第一设备所属的BSS的Color相同时,所述第一设备判定所述控制帧来自于所述第一设备所属的BSS。When the color is the same as the color of the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
接收到的PPDU中的Color域第一设备自身的Color进行比较,两者是否相同决定了该PPDU是否来自第一设备所述BSS。The color of the first device of the Color field in the received PPDU is compared, and whether the two are the same determines whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the first device.
本申请的第十四方面提供了一种判定接收到的控制帧的BSS归属的方法,所述方法包括:A fourteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the method comprising:
第一设备接收第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color,所述尾填充部分包括第一尾信息Tail、第一校验字段、第二尾信息Tail,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color的校验,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后,所述第一尾信息Tail紧随所述PSDU之后,所述第一校验字段位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后、所述第二尾信息Tail之前;The first device receives the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a color of the BSS to which the second device belongs. The tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field is at least a check for the Color, and the PSDU includes the control frame And the PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail immediately after the PSDU, the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, Before the second tail information Tail;
第一设备根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述第一设备所属的BSS。The first device determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
SERVICE域承载Color而Pad bits承载Color对应第一校验字段,并且由第二尾信息Tail保证第一校验字段的可靠性,使得Color具有与PSDU完全相同的可靠性。The SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第一种实现方式中,所述PPDU中包括Color存在指示,用于指示所述PPDU中包括所述Color。With reference to the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the present application, the PPDU includes a color presence indication, and is used to indicate that the color is included in the PPDU.
Color存在指示的引入,使得第三方新设备可确定当前PPDU中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要从Pad bits中去获取Color。The introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第二种实现方式中,所述PPDU中还包括前导域Preamble,所述前导域Preamble位于所述Data域之前,所述Color存在指示位于所述前导域Preamble中。With reference to the first implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in the second implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
Color存在指示放在Preamble中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第三种实现方式中,所述Color存在指示位于所述SERVICE域中,所述第一校验字段至少 是对所述Color和所述Color存在指示的校验。With reference to the first implementation of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a third implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, where the a check field at least Is a check for the presence of the Color and the Color.
利用SERVICE域承载Color存在指示,并基于第一校验字段对其进行校验,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication, and is verified based on the first check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report to the MAC layer. Color. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第四种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括帧控制域,所述Color存在指示位于所述帧控制域中。With reference to the first implementation of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fourth implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PSDU includes a frame control field, and the color presence indication is located at the Said in the frame control domain.
Color存在指示放在MAC层帧控制域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面的第一种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第五种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括接收地址域,所述Color存在指示位于所述接收地址域中。With reference to the first implementation of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fifth implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
Color存在指示放在MAC层RA域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十四方面,在本申请实施例的第十四方面的第六种实现方式中,所述第一设备根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述第一设备所属的BSS,包括:With reference to the fourteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a sixth implementation manner of the fourteenth aspect of the present application, the first device determines, according to the color, whether the control frame is from the first The BSS to which the device belongs includes:
当所述Color与所述第一设备所属的BSS的Color相同时,所述第一设备判定所述控制帧来自于所述第一设备所属的BSS。When the color is the same as the color of the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the first device belongs.
接收到的PPDU中的Color域第一设备自身的Color进行比较,两者是否相同决定了该PPDU是否来自第一设备所述BSS。The color of the first device of the Color field in the received PPDU is compared, and whether the two are the same determines whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the first device.
本申请的第十五方面提供了一种发送承载控制帧的PPDU的方法,所述方法包括:A fifteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the method comprising:
第二设备产生用于承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述尾填充部分包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color和第一尾信息Tail,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后;The second device generates a PPDU for carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, and the tail padding portion includes a Color and a BSS of the BSS to which the second device belongs. a tail information, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
第二设备发送所述PPDU。The second device sends the PPDU.
通过在legacy PPDU的Pad bits中携带Color,使得第三方新设备可获得该Color,并根据Color确定该PPDU是否来自第三方新设备所述BSS,进而设置正确的NAV,使双NAV机制更加有效;同时,由于Color携带在Pad bits中,故不影响第三方legacy设备对该PPDU中PSDU部分的接收。By carrying Color in the Pad bits of the legacy PPDU, the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第一种实现方式中,所述第一尾信息Tail紧随于所述PSDU之后,所述第二设备产生用于承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:With reference to the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a first implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, after the first tail information Tail is followed by the PSDU, the second device generates PPDU for carrying control frames, including:
所述第二设备对所述Data域进行BCC编码;或者,The second device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain; or
所述第二设备对所述SERVICE域、所述PSDU和所述第一尾信息Tail进行BCC编码,对所述Data域中位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting编码。The second device performs BCC encoding on the SERVICE domain, the PSDU, and the first tail information Tail, and performs Tail-biting encoding on a portion of the Data domain that is located after the first tail information Tail.
Tail的位置紧随PSDU,即与legacy PPDU完全相同,使得Color的引入对第三方legacy设备接收PSDU部分完全没有影响。整个Data域采用BCC编码,有利于简化收发端处理, 但由于Pad bits承载能力有限,Color的可靠性降低;而Pad bits部分采用Tail-biting BCC编码,能够有效提高Color的可靠性,但收发端复杂度随之升高。The location of the Tail follows the PSDU, which is exactly the same as the legacy PPDU, so that the introduction of Color has no effect on the third-party legacy device receiving the PSDU part. The entire Data domain uses BCC encoding, which is beneficial to simplify the processing of the transceiver. However, due to the limited carrying capacity of the Pad bits, the reliability of the Color is reduced. The Pad bits part adopts the Tail-biting BCC code, which can effectively improve the reliability of the Color, but the complexity of the transceiver end is increased.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第二种实现方式中,所述第一尾信息Tail位于所述Color之后,所述第二设备产生用于承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:With reference to the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a second implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the first tail information Tail is located after the color, and the second device is generated for A PPDU carrying a control frame, including:
所述第二设备对所述Data域进行BCC编码。The second device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
Tail移到Color之后,可能影响第三方legacy设备对PSDU部分的接收,但Color具有与PSDU部分等同的可靠性。After Tail is moved to Color, it may affect the reception of the PSDU part by the third party legacy device, but Color has the same reliability as the PSDU part.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面或第十五方面的第一种或第二种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第三种实现方式中,所述尾填充部分还包括第一校验字段,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color的校验。With reference to the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first or second implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect, in the third implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the tail filling portion is further A first check field is included, the first check field being at least a checksum of the Color.
第一校验字段的引入,使得Color接收正确与否可被验证。The introduction of the first check field enables the correct reception of Color to be verified.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面或第十五方面的第一种至第三种实现方式中的任意一种,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第四种实现方式中,所述PPDU中包括Color存在指示,用于指示所述PPDU中包括所述Color。With reference to the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application or the first to third implementation manners of the fifteenth aspect, in the fourth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, The PPDU includes a color presence indication for indicating that the color is included in the PPDU.
Color存在指示的引入,使得第三方新设备可确定当前PPDU中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要从Pad bits中去获取Color。The introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第五种实现方式中,所述PPDU中还包括前导域Preamble,所述前导域Preamble位于所述Data域之前,所述Color存在指示位于所述前导域Preamble中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a fifth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the application, the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, and the preamble domain Preamble Before the Data field, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
Color存在指示放在Preamble中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第六种实现方式中,所述Color存在指示位于所述SERVICE域中,所示SERVICE域中包括第二校验字段,所述第二校验字段是对所述Color存在指示的校验。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in a sixth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the SERVICE is displayed. The domain includes a second check field, which is a check indicating the presence of the Color.
利用SERVICE域承载Color存在指示和第二校验字段,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication and the second check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第七种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括帧控制域,所述Color存在指示位于所述帧控制域中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, in a seventh implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PSDU includes a frame control domain, and the color presence indication is located at the location Said in the frame control domain.
Color存在指示放在MAC层帧控制域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
结合本申请实施例的第十五方面的第四种实现方式,在本申请实施例的第十五方面的第八种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括接收地址域,所述Color存在指示位于所述接收地址域中。With reference to the fourth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiment of the present application, in the eighth implementation manner of the fifteenth aspect of the embodiments of the present application, the PSDU includes a receiving address field, and the color presence indication is located at the The receiving address field.
Color存在指示放在MAC层RA域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断, 只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
本申请的第十六方面提供了一种发送承载控制帧的PPDU的方法,所述方法包括:A sixteenth aspect of the present application provides a method for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the method comprising:
第二设备产生用于承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color,所述尾填充部分包括第一尾信息Tail、第一校验字段、第二尾信息Tail,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color的校验,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后,所述第一尾信息Tail紧随所述PSDU之后,所述第一校验字段位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后、所述第二尾信息Tail之前;The second device generates a PPDU for carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, and the SERVICE domain includes a Color of a BSS to which the second device belongs, The tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field is at least a check for the Color, and the PSDU includes the control frame, and The PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail is immediately after the PSDU, and the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, the second tail Before the information Tail;
第二设备发送所述PPDU。The second device sends the PPDU.
SERVICE域承载Color而Pad bits承载Color对应第一校验字段,并且由第二尾信息Tail保证第一校验字段的可靠性,使得Color具有与PSDU完全相同的可靠性。The SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
结合本申请的第十六方面,本申请的第十六方面的第一种实现方式中,所述PPDU中包括Color存在指示,用于指示所述PPDU中包括所述Color。In a first implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, the PPDU includes a color presence indication, and is used to indicate that the color is included in the PPDU.
Color存在指示的引入,使得第三方新设备可确定当前PPDU中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要从Pad bits中去获取Color。The introduction of the Color presence indication enables the third-party new device to determine whether the current PPDU contains Color, and thereby determine whether to obtain the Color from the Pad bits.
结合本申请的第十六方面的第一种实现方式,本申请的第十六方面的第二种实现方式中,所述PPDU中还包括前导域Preamble,所述前导域Preamble位于所述Data域之前,所述Color存在指示位于所述前导域Preamble中。With reference to the first implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, in the second implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, the PPDU further includes a preamble domain Preamble, where the preamble domain Preamble is located in the data domain. Previously, the Color presence indication is located in the Preamble Domain Preamble.
Color存在指示放在Preamble中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the Preamble, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report the Color to the MAC layer. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请的第十六方面的第一种实现方式,本申请的第十六方面的第三种实现方式中,所述Color存在指示位于所述SERVICE域中,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color和所述Color存在指示的校验。In conjunction with the first implementation of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, in a third implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, the color presence indication is located in the SERVICE domain, and the first check field is at least Is a check for the presence of the Color and the Color.
利用SERVICE域承载Color存在指示,并基于第一校验字段对其进行校验,使得第三方新设备在PHY中就可以判断当前PPDU的Pad bits中是否包含Color,进而确定是否要向MAC层上报Color。这能够简化MAC层处理。The SERVICE field is used to carry the Color presence indication, and is verified based on the first check field, so that the third-party new device can determine whether the current PPDU includes the Color in the PHY, and then determine whether to report to the MAC layer. Color. This simplifies MAC layer processing.
结合本申请的第十六方面的第一种实现方式,本申请的第十六方面的第四种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括帧控制域,所述Color存在指示位于所述帧控制域中。In a fourth implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, the PSDU includes a frame control field, where the Color presence indication is located in the frame control domain. .
Color存在指示放在MAC层帧控制域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer frame control domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY. Simply pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing. .
结合本申请的第十六方面的第一种实现方式,本申请的第十六方面的第五种实现方式中,所述PSDU包括接收地址域,所述Color存在指示位于所述接收地址域中。In a fifth implementation manner of the sixteenth aspect of the present application, the PSDU includes a receiving address field, where the Color presence indication is located in the receiving address field. .
Color存在指示放在MAC层RA域中,使得第三方新设备在PHY中无需做任何判断,只需将Pad bits和/或SERVICE中的比特传给MAC层即可,这简化了PHY层处理。The Color presence indicator is placed in the MAC layer RA domain, so that third-party new devices do not need to make any judgment in the PHY, and only need to pass the bits in the Pad bits and/or SERVICE to the MAC layer, which simplifies the PHY layer processing.
本申请的第十七方面提供了一种判定接收到的控制帧的BSS归属的装置,所述设备包括: A seventeenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the apparatus comprising:
接收模块,用于接收第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述尾填充部分包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color和第一尾信息Tail,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后;a receiving module, configured to receive a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the tail padding part includes the second device a color of the BSS and a first tail information Tail, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
解码模块,用于对所述PPDU的所述Data域进行解码,以获得所述Color;a decoding module, configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color;
判定模块,用于根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述装置所属的BSS。And a determining module, configured to determine, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the device belongs.
通过在legacy PPDU的Pad bits中携带Color,使得第三方新设备可获得该Color,并根据Color确定该PPDU是否来自第三方新设备所述BSS,进而设置正确的NAV,使双NAV机制更加有效;同时,由于Color携带在Pad bits中,故不影响第三方legacy设备对该PPDU中PSDU部分的接收。By carrying Color in the Pad bits of the legacy PPDU, the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
本申请的第十八方面提供了一种判定接收到的控制帧的BSS归属的装置,所述装置包括:An eighteenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for determining a BSS attribution of a received control frame, the apparatus comprising:
接收模块,用于接收第二设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述第二设备所属BSS的Color,所述尾填充部分包括第一尾信息Tail、第一校验字段、第二尾信息Tail,所述第一校验字段至少是对所述Color的校验,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后,所述第一尾信息Tail紧随所述PSDU之后,第一校验字段位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后、所述第二尾信息Tail之前;a receiving module, configured to receive a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the second device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a BSS to which the second device belongs. Color, the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field is at least a check for the Color, and the PSDU includes the Controlling a frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field, the first tail information Tail immediately after the PSDU, and the first check field is located after the first tail information Tail, Before the second tail information Tail;
解码模块,用于对所述PPDU的所述Data域进行解码,以获得所述Color;a decoding module, configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color;
判定模块,根据所述Color,确定所述控制帧是否来自所述装置所属的BSS。The determining module determines, according to the Color, whether the control frame is from a BSS to which the device belongs.
SERVICE域承载Color而Pad bits承载Color对应第一校验字段,并且由第二尾信息Tail保证第一校验字段的可靠性,使得Color具有与PSDU完全相同的可靠性。The SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU.
本申请的第十九方面提供了一种发送承载控制帧的PPDU的装置,所述装置包括:A nineteenth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the apparatus comprising:
生成模块,用于产生承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述尾填充部分包括所述装置所属BSS的Color和第一尾信息Tail,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后;a generating module, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, where the tail padding portion includes a Color and a first tail of the BSS to which the device belongs Information Tail, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding portion and after the SERVICE field;
编码模块,用于对所述PPDU的所述Data域进行编码;An encoding module, configured to encode the Data field of the PPDU;
发送模块,用于发送所述PPDU。And a sending module, configured to send the PPDU.
通过在legacy PPDU的Pad bits中携带Color,使得第三方新设备可获得该Color,并根据Color确定该PPDU是否来自第三方新设备所述BSS,进而设置正确的NAV,使双NAV机制更加有效;同时,由于Color携带在Pad bits中,故不影响第三方legacy设备对该PPDU中PSDU部分的接收。By carrying Color in the Pad bits of the legacy PPDU, the third-party new device can obtain the Color, and determine whether the PPDU is from the BSS of the third-party new device according to Color, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective; At the same time, since the Color is carried in the Pad bits, the third-party legacy device does not affect the reception of the PSDU part in the PPDU.
本申请的第二十方面提供了一种发送承载控制帧的PPDU的装置,所述装置包括:A twentieth aspect of the present application provides an apparatus for transmitting a PPDU carrying a control frame, the apparatus comprising:
生成模块,用于产生承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU、尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述装置所属BSS的Color,所述尾填充部分包括第一尾信息Tail、第一校验字段、第二尾信息Tail,所述第一校验字段至 少是对所述Color的校验,所述PSDU包含所述控制帧,且所述PSDU位于所述尾填充部分之前、所述SERVICE域之后,所述第一尾信息Tail紧随所述PSDU之后,第一校验字段位于所述第一尾信息Tail之后、所述第二尾信息Tail之前;a generating module, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding portion, where the SERVICE domain includes a Color of a BSS to which the device belongs, and the tail padding The part includes a first tail information Tail, a first check field, and a second tail information Tail, the first check field to Less is the check of the Color, the PSDU includes the control frame, and the PSDU is located before the tail padding part, after the SERVICE field, and the first tail information Tail is immediately after the PSDU The first check field is located after the first tail information Tail and before the second tail information Tail;
解码模块,用于对所述PPDU的所述Data域进行解码,以获得所述Color;a decoding module, configured to decode the Data field of the PPDU to obtain the Color;
发送模块,用于发送所述PPDU。And a sending module, configured to send the PPDU.
SERVICE域承载Color而Pad bits承载Color对应第一校验字段,并且由第二尾信息Tail保证第一校验字段的可靠性,使得Color具有与PSDU完全相同的可靠性。本申请的又一方面提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。The SERVICE field carries Color and the Pad bits carry Color corresponding to the first check field, and the second tail information Tail guarantees the reliability of the first check field, so that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU. Yet another aspect of the present application provides a computer readable storage medium having instructions stored therein that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the above aspects.
本申请的又一方面提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述各方面所述的方法。Yet another aspect of the present application provides a computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in the various aspects above.
本发明实施例提供的技术方案中,第一设备获取用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识的第一Color后,第一设备根据该第一Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分或者Data域的SERVICE域包括第一Color,然后,第一设备向第二设备发送PPDU,以使第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。然后,第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present invention, after the first device acquires the first color that is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes the Data field. The Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, a tail padding portion, or a SERVICE field of the Data field includes a first color, and then the first device sends a PPDU to the second device, so that the second device obtains the first A PPDU carrying a control frame sent by a device. Then, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines the control The frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的网络架构图;FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application;
图2为一种虚拟载波应用RTS/CTS机制的示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of a virtual carrier application RTS/CTS mechanism;
图3为现有技术提供的四种PPDU结构的示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of four PPDU structures provided by the prior art;
图4为现有技术提供的Legacy PPDU格式的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a Legacy PPDU format provided by the prior art;
图5a为现有技术提供的RTS的MAC帧格式的示意图;FIG. 5a is a schematic diagram of a MAC frame format of an RTS provided by the prior art; FIG.
图5b为现有技术提供的CTS/ACK的MAC帧格式的示意图;FIG. 5b is a schematic diagram of a MAC frame format of a CTS/ACK provided by the prior art; FIG.
图6a为现有技术提供的基于RTS的Control Wrapper帧结构示意图;6a is a schematic structural diagram of an RTS-based Control Wrapper frame provided by the prior art;
图6b为现有技术提供的基于CTS/ACK的Control Wrapper帧结构示意图;6b is a schematic structural diagram of a CTS/ACK-based Control Wrapper frame provided by the prior art;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的方法的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为图7所示实施例的方法涉及的PPDU的结构示意图;8 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in the method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
图9a为图7所示实施例的方法涉及的PPDU的部分结构示意图;9a is a partial structural diagram of a PPDU involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
图9b为图7所示实施例的方法涉及的PPDU的另一部分结构示意图;9b is a schematic structural diagram of another part of a PPDU involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
图10为图7所示实施例的方法涉及的发送设备进行BCC编码的示意图; 10 is a schematic diagram of a BCC encoding performed by a transmitting device involved in the method of the embodiment shown in FIG. 7;
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的方法涉及的PPDU的结构示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图12为与图11的PPDU的结构相应的一种确定BSS归属的方法的流程图;12 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 11;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的方法涉及的PPDU的结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的方法涉及的PPDU的结构和Legacy PPDU结构的对比图;14 is a comparison diagram of a structure of a PPDU and a structure of a Legacy PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图15为与图14的PPDU的结构相应的一种确定BSS归属的方法的流程图;15 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 14;
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的方法涉及的PPDU的结构示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a PPDU involved in a method for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图17为与图16的PPDU的结构相应的一种确定BSS归属的方法的流程图;17 is a flowchart of a method for determining a BSS attribution corresponding to the structure of the PPDU of FIG. 16;
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种包括存在指示的L-SIG结构示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of an L-SIG including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例提供的一种包括存在指示的Frame Control域结构示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a Frame Control field including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种包括存在指示的SERVICE域结构示意图;FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a SERVICE domain including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种包括存在指示的RA域结构示意图;FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of an RA domain including a presence indication according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图22为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的设备的结构示意图;FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种设备的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的设备的结构示意图;FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图25为本申请实施例提供的一种发送控制帧的设备的结构示意图;FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure;
图26为本申请实施例提供的一种发送控制帧的设备的结构示意图。FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
具体实施方式detailed description
本发明的说明书和权利要求书及上述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的内容以外的顺序实施。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first", "second", "third", "fourth", etc. (if present) in the specification and claims of the present invention and the above figures are used to distinguish similar objects without having to use To describe a specific order or order. It is to be understood that the data so used may be interchanged where appropriate so that the embodiments described herein can be implemented in a sequence other than what is illustrated or described herein. In addition, the terms "comprises" and "comprises" and "the" and "the" are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, for example, a process, method, system, product, or device that comprises a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to Those steps or units may include other steps or units not explicitly listed or inherent to such processes, methods, products or devices.
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的网络架构图,该通信系统可用于执行本申请实施例的确定BSS归属的方法和控制帧的发送方法。如图1所示,该网络架构包括接入点(Access Point,AP)101、AP102、站点(Station,STA)111、STA112、STA113。FIG. 1 is a network architecture diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The communication system may be used to perform a method for determining a BSS attribution and a method for transmitting a control frame according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1 , the network architecture includes an access point (AP) 101, an AP 102, a station (Station, STA) 111, a STA 112, and a STA 113.
其中,STA111和STA112与AP101关联,STA113与AP102关联,STA112可收到来自AP101和AP102的帧。STA111和STA112与AP1属于同一BSS,STA113和AP102属于同一BSS。BSS就是小区,即由一个AP和其所关联的STA构成的系统。Among them, STA 111 and STA 112 are associated with AP 101, STA 113 is associated with AP 102, and STA 112 can receive frames from AP 101 and AP 102. STA 111 and STA 112 belong to the same BSS as AP1, and STA 113 and AP 102 belong to the same BSS. A BSS is a cell, a system consisting of an AP and its associated STAs.
随着无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network,WLAN)标准的演进,目前的电气和电子工程师协会(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,IEEE)802.11工作组已开始下一代WiFi标准的研究和制定工作。下一代无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)标准简称高效无线局域网(High Efficiency WLAN,HEW),项目代号802.11ax,目标是将系统容量提升到10Gbps以上,特别关注WiFi设备室外部署和高密度部署两种场景。HEW简 称为HE。With the evolution of the Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) standard, the current Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.11 working group has begun research and development of the next generation of WiFi standards. The next-generation Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) standard is called High Efficiency WLAN (HEW), project code 802.11ax, and the goal is to increase the system capacity to more than 10 Gbps, paying special attention to the outdoor deployment and high-density deployment of WiFi devices. Kind of scene. HEW Jane Called HE.
在高密度部署情况下,传输保护机制显得愈发重要。802.11标准采用虚拟载波侦听(Virtual Carrier Sense)机制进行传输保护。在虚拟载波侦听机制中,发送方和接收方在传输帧中携带传输持续时间值(Duration),表示当前传输过程的剩余持续时间,从而对后续的传输持续时间形成保护。其它设备收到发送方或接收方的传输帧时,将根据其中携带的传输持续时间值设置自己的网络分配矢量(Network Allocation Vector,NAV)计时器。此后,NAV递减计时。在NAV计时器减为0之前,即使侦听到无线信道空闲,设备也不能主动发送数据,从而避免了对其它正在进行的传输造成干扰。In the case of high-density deployments, transmission protection mechanisms are becoming increasingly important. The 802.11 standard uses the Virtual Carrier Sense mechanism for transmission protection. In the virtual carrier sensing mechanism, the sender and the receiver carry a transmission duration value (Duration) in the transmission frame, indicating the remaining duration of the current transmission process, thereby forming protection for the subsequent transmission duration. When other devices receive the transmission frame of the sender or receiver, they will set their own Network Allocation Vector (NAV) timer according to the transmission duration value carried in it. Thereafter, the NAV is decremented. Before the NAV timer is decremented to zero, even if the wireless channel is detected to be idle, the device cannot actively transmit data, thereby avoiding interference with other ongoing transmissions.
一种典型的虚拟载波应用是RTS/CTS机制,如图2所示。源端Source在发送的RTS帧的Duration(持续时间)域中携带了从RTS帧结束到ACK结束之间的时间。若目标端Destination正确接收RTS帧,则在响应帧CTS中携带了从CTS结束到ACK结束之间的时间。其它设备根据RTS/CTS帧中的Duration域设置自己的NAV。若其它设备的NAV本来已经做了设置,则在收到新的Duration域时,需首先比较NAV和Duration值大小,仅当Duration值大于当前NAV值时,才需要用Duration值重新设置NAV。A typical virtual carrier application is the RTS/CTS mechanism, as shown in Figure 2. The source Source carries the time from the end of the RTS frame to the end of the ACK in the Duration field of the transmitted RTS frame. If the destination destination receives the RTS frame correctly, the time between the end of the CTS and the end of the ACK is carried in the response frame CTS. Other devices set their own NAV according to the Duration field in the RTS/CTS frame. If the NAV of other devices has been set, the NAV and Duration values must be compared first when the new Duration field is received. Only when the Duration value is greater than the current NAV value, you need to reset the NAV with the Duration value.
当然,Duration域不仅包含在RTS/CTS帧中,所有控制、管理、数据帧中均包含此域,因此都可以用来设置NAV。Of course, the Duration field is not only included in the RTS/CTS frame, but is included in all control, management, and data frames, so it can be used to set the NAV.
然而,根据上述载波侦听机制设置的NAV存在被无竞争期结束(Contention-Free End,CF-End)错误释放的问题,因为设备收到任何设备发送的CF-End都会重置自己的NAV,即将NAV计时器清零。However, the NAV set according to the above-mentioned carrier sensing mechanism has a problem of being released by the contention-free end (CF-End) error, because the device receives the CF-End sent by any device and resets its own NAV. The NAV timer will be cleared.
如图1所示,STA111和STA112与AP101关联,STA113与AP102关联,STA112可收到来自AP101和AP102的帧。若STA112的NAV根据来自AP101的帧的Duration设置,则当STA112收到来自AP102的CF-End时重置NAV,并开始竞争信道并向AP101发送,这就与STA111向AP101的传输在AP101处发生冲突;反之,若STA112的NAV根据来自AP102的帧的Duration设置,则当STA112收到来自AP101的CF-End时重置NAV,并开始竞争信道并向AP101发送,这就与STA113向AP102的传输在AP102处发生冲突。上述冲突产生的根本原因是,STA基于一个BSS的帧设置的NAV被来自另一个BSS的CF-End所释放,没有达到传输保护的目的。BSS就是小区,即由一个AP和其所关联的STA构成的系统。As shown in FIG. 1, STA 111 and STA 112 are associated with AP 101, STA 113 is associated with AP 102, and STA 112 can receive frames from AP 101 and AP 102. If the NAV of the STA 112 is set according to the Duration of the frame from the AP 101, when the STA 112 receives the CF-End from the AP 102, the NAV is reset, and the contention channel is started and transmitted to the AP 101, which occurs with the transmission of the STA 111 to the AP 101 at the AP 101. Conversely, if the NAV of the STA 112 is set according to the Duration of the frame from the AP 102, the STA 112 resets the NAV when receiving the CF-End from the AP 101, and starts to contend for the channel and transmits to the AP 101, which is transmitted with the STA 113 to the AP 102. A collision occurs at AP102. The root cause of the above conflict is that the NAV set by the STA based on the frame of one BSS is released by the CF-End from another BSS, and the transmission protection is not achieved. A BSS is a cell, a system consisting of an AP and its associated STAs.
针对上述问题,802.11ax中提出了双NAV机制。在双NAV机制中,即每个设备维护的NAV包括intra-NAV(内部NAV)和regular-NAV(常规NAV)两个。当设备收到一个来自本BSS的帧(非CF-End)时,基于其中携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV;当设备收到一个来自重叠的基本服务集(Overlapping Basic SERVICE SetIn response to the above problem, a dual NAV mechanism is proposed in 802.11ax. In the dual NAV mechanism, the NAV maintained by each device includes both intra-NAV (internal NAV) and regular-NAV (conventional NAV). When the device receives a frame from the BSS (non-CF-End), it sets the intra-NAV based on the Duration carried in it, but does not affect the regular-NAV; when the device receives an overlay basic service set (Overlapping Basic SERVICE) Set
,OBSS)的帧(非CF-End)或者不能确定BSS归属的帧时,基于其中携带的Duration设置regular-NAV,但不影响intra-NAV。相应地,当设备收到一个来自本BSS的CF-End时,仅释放intra-NAV;当设备收到一个来自OBSS的CF-End时,仅释放regular-NAV。这样,就避免了根据来自一个BSS的帧设置的NAV被来自另一个BSS的CF-End错误释放的问题,进而避免了冲突。通常情况下,确定一个帧是否本BSS帧,是根据帧MAC部分 包含的BSSID判断的,若其值与设备自身所属BSS的BSSID匹配,则认为是本BSS帧。BSSID通常为48bits,一般与AP的地址一致,但也可以不同。When the frame of the OBSS is not (CF-End) or the frame to which the BSS belongs cannot be determined, the regular-NAV is set based on the Duration carried therein, but the intra-NAV is not affected. Accordingly, when the device receives a CF-End from the BSS, only the intra-NAV is released; when the device receives a CF-End from the OBSS, only the regular-NAV is released. In this way, the problem that the NAV set according to the frame from one BSS is released by the CF-End error from another BSS is avoided, thereby avoiding collision. Normally, determining whether a frame is a BSS frame or not is based on the MAC portion of the frame. If the value of the included BSSID is matched with the BSSID of the BSS to which the device belongs, it is considered to be the BSS frame. The BSSID is usually 48 bits, which is generally the same as the address of the AP, but it can be different.
例如,STA112收到AP101发送的帧时,STA112可根据该帧中的BSSID确定出该帧来自于STA112所属的BSS,从而STA112可根据该帧中携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV。当STA112收到AP102发送的帧时,STA112可根据该帧中的BSSID确定出该帧不是来自于STA112所属的BSS,从而STA112可根据该帧中携带的Duration设置regular-NAV,但不影响intra-NAV。这样,即可避免STA基于一个BSS的帧设置的NAV被来自另一个BSS的CF-End所释放的问题。从而,达到传输保护的目的。For example, when the STA 112 receives the frame sent by the AP 101, the STA 112 may determine, according to the BSSID in the frame, that the frame is from the BSS to which the STA 112 belongs, so that the STA 112 may set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried in the frame, but does not affect the regular- NAV. When the STA 112 receives the frame sent by the AP 102, the STA 112 may determine, according to the BSSID in the frame, that the frame is not from the BSS to which the STA 112 belongs, so that the STA 112 may set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried in the frame, but does not affect the intra- NAV. In this way, the problem that the STA is released based on the CF-End of another BSS based on the frame setting of one BSS can be avoided. Thus, the purpose of transmission protection is achieved.
为配合上述双NAV机制,802.11ax设计的四种PPDU结构的物理头的HE-SIG-A中均包含Color(颜色)和TXOP Duration(传输机会持续时间),如图3所示,Color即图3中的BSS Color。Color长6bits,是BSS的短标识,即相当于BSSID的简化表示,这样,设备只根据接收到的帧的物理头(而无需解出MAC部分)即可判断该帧是否本BSS帧了。In order to cooperate with the above dual NAV mechanism, the HE-SIG-A of the physical headers of the four PPDU structures designed by 802.11ax includes Color (color) and TXOP Duration (transmission opportunity duration), as shown in FIG. BSS Color in 3. The color length is 6 bits, which is the short identifier of the BSS, which is equivalent to the simplified representation of the BSSID. Thus, the device can determine whether the frame is a BSS frame based on the physical header of the received frame (without solving the MAC part).
其中,不同PPDU格式中,Color的位置略有差异,例如,HE单用户(Single User,SU)/扩展范围的(Extended Range,ER)PPDU中Color位于B8-B13位,而HE多用户(Multiple User,MU)PPDU中Color位于B5-B10位。一个BSS的Color通常是由AP在初始化网络时取定的,但也可随时修改。TXOP Duration即前面提及的Duration,只不过以前放在MAC头中(位于图3中Data中),而802.11ax则是在物理头中也携带。Among them, in different PPDU formats, the position of Color is slightly different. For example, in Single User (SU)/Extended Range (ER) PPDU, Color is located in B8-B13, and HE is Multi-User (Multiple). User, MU) The color of the PPDU is located in the B5-B10 bit. The color of a BSS is usually determined by the AP when it initializes the network, but can be modified at any time. The TXOP Duration is the aforementioned Duration, but it was previously placed in the MAC header (in Data in Figure 3), while 802.11ax is also carried in the physical header.
通过物理头携带Color和传输机会(Transmission Opportunity,TXOP)Duration,使得任何设备根据物理头即可判断该帧的BSS归属,并根据TXOP Duration设置NAV,而不必去解MAC部分,从而更加省电。The physical head carries Color and Transmission Opportunity (TXOP) Duration, so that any device can determine the BSS attribution of the frame according to the physical header, and set the NAV according to the TXOP Duration without having to solve the MAC part, thereby saving power.
但是有些帧的MAC帧中可能不包括BSSID,并且其无法通过物理头携带Color来指示BSS的归属。However, the BSSID may not be included in the MAC frame of some frames, and it cannot carry the Color through the physical header to indicate the attribution of the BSS.
802.11中的MAC帧可分为数据帧、管理帧、控制帧三大类。其中,数据帧、管理帧中至少有三个地址域,其中至少有一个地址域承载BSSID。然而,控制帧却并非如此。The MAC frames in 802.11 can be divided into three categories: data frames, management frames, and control frames. The data frame and the management frame have at least three address domains, and at least one of the address domains carries a BSSID. However, control frames are not the case.
例如,部分控制帧的MAC头地址域中可能不包含BSSID。如表1所示,当前2.4/5GHz频段802.11标准中常用控制帧总体可分为两类,如PS-Poll、Trigger等帧,其MAC头中包括RA和TA两个地址域,且其中必有一个地址域为BSSID。而对于RTS、CTS等帧,其MAC头地址域中则可能不包含BSSID:对于CTS和ACK帧,由于MAC头中只有RA域,故当用于DL传输和DLS/TDLS传输时,RA域不包含BSSID;而对于RTS、BA和BAR帧,其MAC头中有RA和TA两个地址域,当用于DLS/TDLS传输时,RA域和TA域都不包含BSSID。DLS/TDLS传输是指同一AP关联的两个STA之间的传输,RA域和TA域分别为收发双方的地址,显然不包含BSSID。另一方面,RTS、CTS等控制帧主要作用在于传输保护,旧有(legacy)设备也应能够接收,因此,这些控制帧不能采用HE PPDU格式传输,而只能使用legacy PPDU格式传输,即无法通过物理头包括Color来指示BSS归属。所谓legacy PPDU格式,即802.11a/g标准提出的基于OFDM的PPDU格式,如图4所示,其中,PSDU即MAC帧。Legacy PPDU又称为non-HT PPDU。For example, the MAC header address field of a partial control frame may not contain a BSSID. As shown in Table 1, the current common control frames in the 802.11 standard of the 2.4/5 GHz band can be divided into two categories, such as PS-Poll and Trigger. The MAC header includes two address domains, RA and TA, and must have One address field is the BSSID. For frames such as RTS and CTS, the MAC header address field may not include the BSSID: for CTS and ACK frames, since there are only RA domains in the MAC header, when used for DL transmission and DLS/TDLS transmission, the RA domain is not The BSSID is included; for the RTS, BA, and BAR frames, there are two address domains, RA and TA, in the MAC header. When used for DLS/TDLS transmission, neither the RA domain nor the TA domain contain the BSSID. The DLS/TDLS transmission refers to the transmission between two STAs associated with the same AP. The RA domain and the TA domain are the addresses of the transmitting and receiving parties respectively, and obviously do not contain the BSSID. On the other hand, control frames such as RTS and CTS are mainly used for transmission protection, and legacy devices should also be able to receive. Therefore, these control frames cannot be transmitted in the HE PPDU format, but can only be transmitted using the legacy PPDU format. The BSS attribution is indicated by the physical header including Color. The so-called legacy PPDU format, that is, the OFDM-based PPDU format proposed by the 802.11a/g standard, is shown in FIG. 4, where the PSDU is a MAC frame. Legacy PPDUs are also known as non-HT PPDUs.
表1: Table 1:
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000001
由于RTS、CTS、ACK、BA、BAR的MAC头中不包含BSSID,且无法通过物理头承载Color,故当STA收到这样的一个控制帧且其地址域中不包含该STA所属BSS的BSSID时,STA并不能确定这个帧是否是来自本BSS设备的控制帧。按照当前规则,STA将使用该帧中的Duration更新自己的regular-NAV,但regular-NAV只能被来自OBSS的CF-End释放。Since the BSS ID is not included in the MAC header of the RTS, CTS, ACK, BA, and BAR, and the color cannot be carried by the physical header, when the STA receives such a control frame and the address field does not include the BSSID of the BSS to which the STA belongs. The STA cannot determine whether this frame is a control frame from the BSS device. According to the current rule, the STA will update its regular-NAV using Duration in the frame, but the regular-NAV can only be released by the CF-End from the OBSS.
参阅图1,假设该控制帧实际上来自本BSS中设备AP101,当STA112收到来自本BSS的CF-End时,并不会释放regular-NAV,但是因该帧的MAC头中不包含BSSID,且无法通过物理头承载Color,STA112不能确定这个帧是否是来自本BSS设备的控制帧,从而SAT112根据该控制帧释放regular-NAV,这减少了STA112发送的机会;当STA收到来自OBSS的CF-End时,会释放regular-NAV,这使得STA竞争信道并向AP发送,进而对正在进行的传输造成干扰。Referring to FIG. 1, it is assumed that the control frame is actually from the device AP101 in the BSS. When the STA 112 receives the CF-End from the BSS, the regular-NAV is not released, but since the MAC header of the frame does not include the BSSID, And the color cannot be transmitted by the physical header, and the STA 112 cannot determine whether the frame is a control frame from the BSS device, so that the SAT 112 releases the regular-NAV according to the control frame, which reduces the chance of the STA 112 being sent; when the STA receives the CF from the OBSS When -End, regular-NAV is released, which causes the STA to contend for the channel and send it to the AP, thereby causing interference to the ongoing transmission.
显然,当STA收到一个不能确定BSS归属但实际上来自本BSS设备的控制帧并进而设置regular-NAV时,双NAV机制完全失效,NAV被错误释放的问题将出现,并且可能出现NAV无法被释放的情况,从而对正在进行的传输造成干扰,或者降低STA的传输机会。Obviously, when the STA receives a control frame that cannot determine the BSS attribution but actually comes from the BSS device and then sets the regular-NAV, the dual NAV mechanism is completely invalid, the problem that the NAV is released by mistake will occur, and the NAV may not be The situation of release, thereby causing interference to the ongoing transmission, or reducing the transmission opportunity of the STA.
针对上述控制帧的BSS归属无法区分的问题,本申请提出一种方法,能够使得设备有效区分以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧,进而设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了STA传输机会,具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。For the problem that the BSS attribution of the control frame cannot be distinguished, the present application provides a method for enabling the device to effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format, thereby setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Added STA transmission opportunities with backward compatibility and constant transmission overhead.
其中,Legacy PPDU格式如图4所示,其由前导域Preamble和数据Data域构成,Data域又包括SERVICE域、PSDU和尾填充部分。其中,PSDU即MAC帧,在设备中,PSDU由MAC层生成,并传给物理层(Physical Layer;PHY)。PHY在PSDU之前加上2bytes的SERVICE域,在PSDU之后加上6bits尾信息(Tail)以及可能存在的填充比特(Pad bits),从而形成Data域。然后,PHY对整个Data进行加扰、二进制卷积码(Binary Convolutional Code,BCC)信道编码、交织、调制、空间映射等处理,形成处理后的Data域。最后,在处理后的Data域之前加上L-短训练域(Short Training Field,STF)、旧有的(Legacy,L)-长训练域(Long Training Field,LTF)、L-信号域(Signal,SIG),形成legacy PPDU。 其中,L-STF、L-LTF、L-SIG称为物理头,又称为前导域Preamble,或旧有前导域L-preamble;位于PSDU之后的Tail和Pad bits又称为尾填充部分。The Legacy PPDU format is as shown in FIG. 4, which is composed of a preamble domain Preamble and a data Data field, and the Data domain includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU, and a tail padding section. The PSDU is a MAC frame. In the device, the PSDU is generated by the MAC layer and transmitted to the physical layer (Physical Layer; PHY). The PHY adds a 2 bytes SERVICE field before the PSDU, and adds 6 bits of tail information (Tail) and possibly existing pad bits to the PSDU to form a Data field. Then, the PHY performs scrambling, Binary Convolutional Code (BCC) channel coding, interleaving, modulation, spatial mapping, and the like on the entire Data to form a processed Data field. Finally, add the L-Short Training Field (STF), the legacy (Legacy, L)-Long Training Field (LTF), and the L-Signal Domain (Signal) before the processed Data field. , SIG), forming a legacy PPDU. Among them, L-STF, L-LTF, L-SIG are called physical headers, also known as preamble domain Preamble, or old preamble domain L-preamble; Tail and Pad bits located after PSDU are also called tail-filled parts.
在Legacy PPDU的上述生成过程中,Tail通常为6bits全零序列,作用是提高接收端BCC译码性能。Pad bits也是全零序列,其作用是使得Data域长度为每符号承载有效比特数(NDBPS)的整数倍。DBPS即Data Bits per OFDM Symbol(每OFDM符号包含的数据比特)。所谓每符号承载有效比特数,是指每OFDM符号中承载的未编码比特数。例如,一个OFDM符号包含48个子载波,采用二进制相移键控(Binary Phase Shift Keying,BPSK)调制,信道编码码率为1/2,则NDBPS=48×1/2=24bits;若采用正交二进制相移键控(Quadrature Binary Phase Shift Keying,QPSK)调制,码率3/4,则NDBPS=48×2×3/4=72bits。公式(1)是发送端的PHY计算Pad bits长度(NPAD)的过程,其中,LENGTH是PSDU长度(即MAC帧长度,单位:bytes),由MAC层通过原语告知PHY。显然,由于LENGTH取值可变,Pad bits的长度也是可变的。In the above generation process of the Legacy PPDU, the Tail is usually a 6-bit all-zero sequence, which is to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end. Pad bits are also all zero sequences, which are used to make the length of the Data field an integer multiple of the number of valid bits per symbol (N DBPS ). DBPS is Data Bits per OFDM Symbol (data bits per OFDM symbol). The so-called effective number of bits per symbol refers to the number of uncoded bits carried in each OFDM symbol. For example, an OFDM symbol consists of 48 subcarriers, using Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) modulation, and the channel coding rate is 1/2, then N DBPS = 48 × 1/2 = 24 bits; Quadrature Binary Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) modulation, code rate 3/4, then N DBPS = 48 × 2 × 3 / 4 = 72 bits. Equation (1) is a process in which the PHY of the transmitting end calculates the Pad bit length (N PAD ), where LENGTH is the PSDU length (ie, the MAC frame length, unit: bytes), and the MAC layer informs the PHY through the primitive. Obviously, the length of the Pad bits is also variable due to the variable value of LENGTH.
公式1:Formula 1:
NSYM=Ceiling((16+8×LENGTH+6)/NDBPS)N SYM =Ceiling((16+8×LENGTH+6)/N DBPS )
NDATA=NSYM×NDBPS N DATA =N SYM ×N DBPS
NPAD=NDATA-(16+8×LENGTH+6)N PAD =N DATA -(16+8×LENGTH+6)
与数据帧、管理帧的不同之处在于,大部分控制帧的长度都是相对固定的,对于Legacy PPDU所支持的8种调制编码方案(Modulation and Coding Scheme,MCS)而言,这些控制帧的Pad bits长度是可以确定的。表2给出了RTS帧和CTS/ACK帧在各种MCS下的Pad bits长度,其中,QAM即Quadrature Amplitude Modulation(正交振幅调制)。RTS和CTS的MAC帧格式如图5(a)和图5(b)所示,ACK帧与CTS帧的MAC帧格式完全相同。表2中R1-R4为L-SIG中RATE域的取值,表示MCS索引;斜体的四种MCS是必选MCS,其它MCS为可选支持的MCS。由表中最后两列可知,无论采用何种MCS,RTS和CTS/ACK帧的Pad bits都至少有10bits,而Color为6bits,故这些控制帧的Pad bits足以承载Color。The difference from the data frame and the management frame is that the length of most control frames is relatively fixed. For the 8 Modulation and Coding Schemes (MCS) supported by the Legacy PPDU, these control frames are The length of the Pad bits is determinable. Table 2 shows the Pad bit lengths of the RTS frame and the CTS/ACK frame under various MCSs, where QAM is Quadrature Amplitude Modulation. The MAC frame format of the RTS and CTS is as shown in FIG. 5(a) and FIG. 5(b), and the ACK frame is identical to the MAC frame format of the CTS frame. In Table 2, R1 - R4 are the values of the RATE field in the L-SIG, indicating the MCS index; the four MCS in italics are mandatory MCS, and the other MCS are optional supported MCS. As can be seen from the last two columns in the table, regardless of the MCS, the RTS and CTS/ACK frames have at least 10 bits of Pad bits, and the Color is 6 bits, so the Pad bits of these control frames are sufficient to carry Color.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2017073613-appb-000003
本申请实施例的方法,解决设备有效区分以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧的问题,即通过在控制帧的Pad bits部分承载Color或者在承载控制帧的PPDU的SERVICE域上携带Color实现。The method in the embodiment of the present application solves the problem that the device effectively distinguishes the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format, that is, by carrying Color in the Pad bits portion of the control frame or carrying the Color on the SERVICE field of the PPDU carrying the control frame.
需要说明的是,BA和BAR帧有多种变体(variant),不同变体的格式和长度各不相同,这导致他们的Pad bits长度变化较大,可能出现Pad bits长度小于10bits的情况。此时,Pad bits不足以承载Color。因此,对于BA和BAR帧,可以采用尽力而为的方式:当Pad bits长度不少于10bits时,在其中承载Color;否则,则不承载Color。另一方面,BA/BAR的BSS归属即使无法确定,也不会带来严重后果。这是因为,BA/BAR用于块确认过程,该过程显然位于一个交互序列(exchange sequence)的最后阶段,即其MAC帧中的Duration值很小,即使利用其设置了错误的NAV,也会很快耗尽,在如此短的时间内,收到CF-End从而导致出现干扰或不能被释放的概率很小。而RTS/CTS则不同,它们位于一个交互序列的起始阶段,用于对当前交互序列的剩余时间进行传输保护,故其MAC帧中的Duration较大,一旦RTS/CTS的BSS归属无法确定,进而根据该Duration设置了regular-NAV,则会持续较长时间,导致出现干扰或不能被释放的概率较大。ACK帧一般位于一个交互序列的最后阶段,Duration较小,但当ACK用于分片(Fragmentation)传输时,ACK帧的Duration用于对随后的数据和确认帧进行传输保护,此时,ACK的Duration也会较大。因此,本申请主要针对RTS/CTS/ACK这三种Duration较大的管理帧以及基于这三种帧的Control Wrapper(控制封装)帧。基于RTS/CTS/ACK的Control Wrapper帧结构如图6(a)和图6(b)所示,采用类似表2的分析可以发现,它们的Pad bits至少长10bits。It should be noted that there are many variants of the BA and BAR frames. Different variants have different formats and lengths, which results in a large change in the length of their Pad bits, and may occur when the length of the Pad bits is less than 10 bits. At this time, the Pad bits are not enough to carry Color. Therefore, for BA and BAR frames, a best-effort approach can be used: when the length of the Pad bits is not less than 10 bits, the Color is carried therein; otherwise, the Color is not carried. On the other hand, the BSS attribution of BA/BAR will not have serious consequences even if it cannot be determined. This is because BA/BAR is used in the block acknowledgment process, which is obviously located in the final stage of an exchange sequence, that is, the Duration value in its MAC frame is small, even if it is set with the wrong NAV. It runs out quickly, and in such a short period of time, the probability of receiving CF-End causing interference or being unable to be released is small. RTS/CTS is different. They are located in the initial stage of an interaction sequence and are used to transmit and protect the remaining time of the current interaction sequence. Therefore, the Duration in the MAC frame is large. Once the BSS attribution of the RTS/CTS cannot be determined, Furthermore, if regular-NAV is set according to the duration, it will last for a long time, and the probability of occurrence of interference or being unable to be released is large. The ACK frame is generally located in the last stage of an interaction sequence, and the Duration is small, but when the ACK is used for Fragmentation transmission, the Duration of the ACK frame is used to transmit and protect the subsequent data and the acknowledgement frame. At this time, the ACK is The Duration will also be larger. Therefore, the present application is mainly directed to three kinds of Duration large management frames of RTS/CTS/ACK and Control Wrapper frames based on these three frames. The control Wrapper frame structure based on RTS/CTS/ACK is shown in Fig. 6(a) and Fig. 6(b). Using the analysis similar to Table 2, it can be found that their Pad bits are at least 10 bits long.
还需说明的是,若控制帧的传输采用non-HT duplicate(非高吞吐量复制)传输,即首先产生20MHz的控制帧,然后以20MHz为单位进行频域复制,则每个20MHz控制帧的Pad bits中都包含Color。换言之,Color位于20MHz控制帧的Pad bits中,频域复制时,位于Pad bits中的Color也会被复制,从而使每个20MHz的Pad bits中都有Color信息。It should also be noted that if the control frame transmission uses non-HT duplicate (non-high throughput copy) transmission, that is, first generate a 20 MHz control frame, and then perform frequency domain copying in units of 20 MHz, then each 20 MHz control frame is Color is included in the Pad bits. In other words, Color is located in the Pad bits of the 20MHz control frame. When copying in the frequency domain, the Color in the Pad bits is also copied, so that each 20MHz Pad bits has Color information.
本申请实施例提供的确定BSS归属的方法和发送控制帧的方法,不改变控制帧的帧结构,将Color放在legacy PPDU中,使得第三方设备可以获得Color,从而判定当前控制帧的BSS归属,同时不影响legacy设备正确接收控制帧。其中,Legacy设备是指不支持本申请方案的设备。The method for determining the BSS attribution and the method for sending the control frame provided by the embodiment of the present application do not change the frame structure of the control frame, and the Color is placed in the legacy PPDU, so that the third party device can obtain the Color, thereby determining the BSS attribution of the current control frame. At the same time, it does not affect the legitimate device receiving the control frame correctly. The Legacy device refers to a device that does not support the solution of the present application.
下面即对本申请实施例的方法进行描述。The method of the embodiment of the present application is described below.
其中,本申请实施例将Color填充进PPDU中的方法主要包括下述两种类型:The method for filling the color into the PPDU in the embodiment of the present application mainly includes the following two types:
1、将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的尾填充部分1. Fill Color into the tail padding part of the PPDU's Data field.
第一设备获取第一Color,该第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。第一设备根据第一Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,该PPDU包括Data域,该Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color。然后,第一设备向第二设备发送PPDU。从而,第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。然后,第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS 进行标识,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定该PPDU携带的控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。The first device acquires a first color, and the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color. Then, the first device sends a PPDU to the second device. Therefore, the second device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device. Then, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
从而,第二设备可根据该判断结果执行相应的操作,例如,在第二设备确定该PPDU携带的控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS时,第二设备可根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV,或者,第二设备根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,释放intra-NAV,但不影响regular-NAV。若PPDU中的第一Color和该第二设备预存的第二Color不相同,则第二设备确定该PPDU中的控制帧不是来自于第二设备所属的BSS。从而,第二设备可根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置regular-NAV,但不影响intra-NAV,或者,根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,仅释放regular-NAV。Therefore, the second device may perform a corresponding operation according to the determination result. For example, when the second device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the second device belongs, the second device may perform the duration setting according to the control frame. intra-NAV, but does not affect regular-NAV, or the second device releases intra-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame, but does not affect regular-NAV. If the first color in the PPDU is different from the second color pre-stored by the second device, the second device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is not from the BSS to which the second device belongs. Therefore, the second device can set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not affect the intra-NAV, or only releases the regular-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame.
其中,PPDU的Data域中的尾填充部分携带Color的具体实现方式有多种,下文将举出其中四种具体实施例,具体描述请参阅下述相关内容。There are a plurality of specific implementation manners for carrying the color in the tail padding part of the data field of the PPDU. Four specific embodiments are hereinafter described. For details, refer to the following related content.
2、将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的SERVICE域2. Fill Color into the SERVICE field in the Data field of the PPDU.
第一设备获取第一Color,该第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,第一设备根据该第一Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确。跟着,第一设备根据第一Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,该SERVICE域包括第一Color,该PSDU域包括控制帧,该尾填充部分包括校验字段。第一设备可向第二设备发送该PPDU,以使第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。跟着,第二设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。The first device acquires a first color, and the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first device generates a check field according to the first color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly. Then, the first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, where the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes A control frame, the tail padding portion including a check field. The first device may send the PPDU to the second device, so that the second device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device. Then, the second device determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, The second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
具体的判断PPDU中的控制帧的来源过程和根据判断结果执行的操作可参考上述将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的尾填充部分的相应描述。The specific process of determining the source of the control frame in the PPDU and the operation performed according to the judgment result may refer to the corresponding description of the tail padding portion of the Data field in which the Color is filled into the PPDU.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,第一设备获取用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识的第一Color后,第一设备根据该第一Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分或者Data域的SERVICE域可包括第一Color,然后,第一设备向第二设备发送PPDU,以使第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。然后,第二设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若第一Color和第二Color相同,则第二设备确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,该PPDU可以为上述的legacy PPDU格式,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。所谓后向兼容,是指采用这种填充方式的PPDU可被legacy设备正确理解,即PPDU中的新增内容不影响legacy设备对PPDU所承载的控制帧的接收。 In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, after the first device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the first device belongs, the first device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes the Data field. The Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, a tail padding portion, or a SERVICE field of the Data field may include a first color, and then the first device sends a PPDU to the second device, so that the second device acquires The PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device. Then, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines the control frame From the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, by comparing the colors, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format, and the PPDU can be in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the double The NAV mechanism is more efficient, avoids interference, and increases equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead. The so-called backward compatibility means that the PPDUs in this padding mode can be correctly understood by the legacy device, that is, the new content in the PPDU does not affect the reception of the control frame carried by the legacy device to the PPDU.
依据上文的说明,下文即对本申请实施例的确定BSS归属的方法进行详细描述,其中下文将举出5个具体的实施例,这些实施例的每一确定BSS归属的方法包括发送控制帧的方法和确定BSS归属的方法两部分。其中,本申请下述实施例的PPDU以legacy PPDU为例进行说明。According to the above description, the following describes the method for determining the BSS attribution in the embodiment of the present application, where five specific embodiments will be hereinafter, and each method for determining the BSS attribution of these embodiments includes sending a control frame. The method and the method of determining the attribution of BSS are two parts. The PPDUs in the following embodiments of the present application are described by taking a legacy PPDU as an example.
首先对将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的尾填充部分的具体实施例进行描述,下文即举出其中四个例子。A specific embodiment of the tail-filling portion of the Data field in which Color is filled into the PPDU is first described, and four examples are given below.
1)Pad bits部分采用Tail-biting BCC编码1) Pad bits are encoded in Tail-biting BCC
根据前述分析,RTS/CTS/ACK帧可用的Pad bits只有10bits。若采用BCC编码,则Pad bits中需包含Color(6bits)、循环冗余编码(Cyclic Redundancy Code;CRC)(至少4bits)和Tail(6bits)。显然,10bits的Pad bits部分是不足以承载如此多信息的。有鉴于此,对于Pad bits部分使用Tail-biting(咬尾)BCC编码,可省去Tail部分,即只传输Color(6bits)和CRC(4bits),共10bits的大小。According to the foregoing analysis, the available Pad bits for the RTS/CTS/ACK frame is only 10 bits. If BCC encoding is used, the Pad bits must include Color (6 bits), Cyclic Redundancy Code (CRC) (at least 4 bits) and Tail (6 bits). Obviously, the 10 bits of Pad bits is not enough to carry so much information. In view of this, the Tail-biting BCC encoding is used for the Pad bits portion, and the Tail portion can be omitted, that is, only Color (6 bits) and CRC (4 bits) are transmitted, for a total of 10 bits.
参阅图7,本申请实施例提供的方法具体如下:Referring to FIG. 7, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is specifically as follows:
步骤701:发送设备获取第一Color。Step 701: The sending device acquires the first color.
其中,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识。The first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs.
发送设备以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧,即通过legacy PPDU承载控制帧。在此之前,发送设备获取第一Color,例如可以从发送设备上的存储模块获取预存的第一Color,或者发送设备从AP获取第一Color。The control frame sent by the sending device in the legacy PPDU format, that is, the control frame is carried by the legacy PPDU. Prior to this, the transmitting device acquires the first Color, for example, the pre-stored first Color may be acquired from a storage module on the transmitting device, or the transmitting device acquires the first Color from the AP.
其中,第一Color通常是由AP在初始化网络时取定的,但也可随时修改。其中第一Color的具体形式可参考上文中对Color的具体描述。The first color is usually determined by the AP when the network is initialized, but can also be modified at any time. The specific form of the first Color can be referred to the specific description of Color in the above.
步骤702:发送设备根据第一Color生成CRC。Step 702: The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
CRC是一种校验码,用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。The CRC is a check code used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly.
发送设备在发送该第一Color后,接收设备获取该第一Color,接收端需要确定该第一Color是否接收正确,以提高Color接收的可靠性。为了实现该目的,发送设备在发送该第一Color之前,发送设备先根据该第一Color生成CRC。接收端即可根据该CRC验证该第一Color是否接收正确。其中发送设备可使用预定义的算法根据第一Color生成CRC。After the sending device sends the first color, the receiving device acquires the first color, and the receiving end needs to determine whether the first color is received correctly, so as to improve the reliability of Color receiving. To achieve this, the transmitting device first generates a CRC according to the first Color before transmitting the first Color. The receiving end can verify whether the first color is received correctly according to the CRC. Wherein the transmitting device can generate a CRC according to the first Color using a predefined algorithm.
可以理解,该CRC只是实现校验的其中一种形式,承载于校验字段中。校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确,在本申请有的实施例中,该校验字段还可以承载其它的具体形式的校验码,例如,奇偶校验码等,本申请实施例对校验字段的具体形式不作具体限定。It can be understood that the CRC is only one form of implementation verification, and is carried in the check field. The check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly. In the embodiment of the present application, the check field may also carry other specific forms of check codes, for example, a parity check code, etc., the present application The specific form of the check field is not specifically limited in the embodiment.
步骤703:发送设备根据第一Color和CRC生成承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 703: The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the CRC.
该PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,该尾填充部分包括第一Color。The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color.
其中,PPDU的尾填充部分包括校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和第一Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部。The tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field. In the tail padding portion, the check field and the first color are located after the tail information Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion.
具体来说,发送设备在生成承载控制帧的PPDU时,将获取的第一Color填充进PPDU的尾填充部分,以及将CRC填充进该尾填充部分。从而,在尾填充部分中填充有第一Color 和CRC,且CRC和第一Color位于尾信息Tail之后,第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部。在图7所示的实施例中,关于PPDU的具体结构,可参考图8所示的PPDU的结构示意图。Specifically, when generating the PPDU carrying the control frame, the sending device fills the acquired first color into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, and fills the CRC into the tail padding portion. Thus, the first color is filled in the tail fill portion And CRC, and after the CRC and the first Color are located at the tail information Tail, the first Color is located at the end of the tail padding portion. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, regarding the specific structure of the PPDU, reference may be made to the structural diagram of the PPDU shown in FIG. 8.
其中,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Among them, Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
发送设备生成承载控制帧的PPDU的方法具体可参考上述相关内容。For the method for the sending device to generate the PPDU carrying the control frame, refer to the related content.
其中,在本申请实施例中,发送设备在生成承载控制帧的PPDU时,为实现本实施例的方法,发送设备的MAC层将PSDU传给PHY的同时,还需将第一Color和CRC作为原语参数TXVECTOR的元素,通过PHY-TXSTART.request原语传给PHY。当PHY发现来自MAC层的TXVECTOR中包含第一Color和CRC这两个元素时,在填充Pad bits时将不再是填0,而是按照本实施例的方法进行填充,即将Color和CRC填充进PPDU的Pad bits部分。这样,即可实现发送设备根据第一Color和CRC生成承载控制帧的PPDU。In the embodiment of the present application, when the sending device generates the PPDU carrying the control frame, in order to implement the method in this embodiment, the MAC layer of the sending device transmits the PSDU to the PHY, and the first color and the CRC are also required. The element of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR is passed to the PHY via the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive. When the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC layer contains the first element of Color and CRC, it will not be filled with 0 when padding the Pad bits, but will be filled according to the method of this embodiment, that is, the Color and CRC are filled in. The Pad bits portion of the PPDU. In this way, the transmitting device can generate the PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first Color and the CRC.
如图8所示,其为本申请实施例的legacy PPDU格式控制帧的Data域结构。其中,原本用于放置Pad bits的位置,在本实施例中放置CRC、第一Color以及可能存在的剩余Pad bits(即图中的Pad);CRC至少是对Color的校验,在有的实施例中,CRC也可以是对Pad和第一Color的校验。Pad和CRC的前后顺序可以互换,如图9(a)所示;还可以将Pad分为Pad1和Pad 2两部分,两者分别位于CRC的前后,如图9(b)所示。总之,CRC位于原本Pad bits中固定位置即可。Pad的存在是由于原本的Pad bits长度可能大于10bits,在利用其中10bits承载Color和CRC之后,还会剩余一些Pad,这些Pad可以填0,也可以用来承载其它信息。显然,若原本的Pad bits恰好是10bits,则不会有Pad存在,故而,图8、图9a和图9b中的Pad域用虚线框表示。As shown in FIG. 8, it is a Data field structure of a legacy PPDU format control frame in the embodiment of the present application. Wherein, in the original position for placing the Pad bits, in the embodiment, the CRC, the first color, and the remaining Pad bits (ie, the Pad in the figure) may be placed; the CRC is at least the verification of the Color, and in some implementations. In the example, the CRC may also be a check of the Pad and the first Color. The order of the Pad and the CRC can be interchanged, as shown in Figure 9(a). The Pad can also be divided into two parts, Pad1 and Pad2, which are located before and after the CRC, as shown in Figure 9(b). In short, the CRC can be located in a fixed position in the original Pad bits. The existence of the Pad is due to the fact that the original Pad bits may be longer than 10 bits. After using 10 bits to carry Color and CRC, there will be some Pads remaining. These Pads can be filled with 0 or used to carry other information. Obviously, if the original Pad bits are exactly 10 bits, there will be no Pad, so the Pad fields in Figures 8, 9a and 9b are indicated by dashed boxes.
其中,在本申请实施例中,第一Color必须位于尾填充部分的尾部,这是由后续的Tail-biting BCC编码步骤的特点所决定的:发送设备用待传输的第一Color作为如图10所示802.11BCC编码器的初始值对Pad bits、CRC和Color进行BCC编码,编码器初始值第一Color与传输数据尾部的第一Color形成“咬尾”。In the embodiment of the present application, the first color must be located at the tail of the tail-filling portion, which is determined by the characteristics of the subsequent Tail-biting BCC encoding step: the transmitting device uses the first color to be transmitted as shown in FIG. 10 The initial values of the illustrated 802.11 BCC encoder are BCC encoded for Pad bits, CRC, and Color, and the encoder initial value First Color forms a "tail biting" with the first Color of the tail of the transmitted data.
在本申请的一些实施例中,发送设备可根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,即在生成的PPDU中,可以不包括CRC,相应的,在该申请的实施例中,发送设备可以不用执行步骤702。In some embodiments of the present application, the sending device may generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, that is, in the generated PPDU, the CRC may not be included. Correspondingly, in the embodiment of the application, the sending device may not perform the step. 702.
步骤704:发送设备对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail部分进行BCC编码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。Step 704: The transmitting device performs BCC encoding on the Tail and Tail portions in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC encoding on the portion after the Tail in the Data domain.
将第一Color设置在尾填充部分的末端,是为了进行Tail-biting BCC编码做准备。The first Color is set at the end of the tail-fill portion in preparation for Tail-biting BCC encoding.
具体来说,发送设备的PHY层对于Data域中位于Tail之前以及包括Tail在内的部分采用传统BCC编码,而对于Tail之后的部分采用Tail-biting BCC编码,并且Tail-biting BCC编码时的编码器初始值为第一Color。Specifically, the PHY layer of the transmitting device uses the traditional BCC encoding for the portion before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and the Tail-biting BCC encoding for the portion after the Tail, and the encoding for the Tail-biting BCC encoding. The initial value of the device is the first Color.
通过上述过程的执行,发送设备即生成了承载控制帧的PPDU,从而发送设备可向接收设备发送该PPDU,以使接收设备执行相应的操作,例如,接收设备可根据该PPDU上的第一Color确定该PPDU或者该PPDU承载的控制帧的来源,如下述步骤708和步骤709所示。Through the execution of the foregoing process, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device can send the PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device performs a corresponding operation, for example, the receiving device can be based on the first color on the PPDU. The source of the control frame carried by the PPDU or the PPDU is determined, as shown in steps 708 and 709 below.
在本申请的一些实施例中,该PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括 Color。In some embodiments of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
例如,该存在指示可以是在发送设备生成PPDU时,向该PPDU填充得到的。For example, the presence indication may be populated to the PPDU when the transmitting device generates the PPDU.
为了使得接收设备获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,接收设备的PHY可以决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层,发送设备可以在PPDU中增加存在指示,接收设备在获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,可以根据该存在指示判断是否去识别该PPDU中的第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层。这样可提高接收设备执行本申请实施例的方法的效率。After the receiving device obtains the PPDU sent by the sending device, the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU. The presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer. This can improve the efficiency of the receiving device performing the method of the embodiment of the present application.
对于本实施例而言,存在指示用于指示PPDU的尾填充部分包括第一Color。例如,存在指示为PPDU中1比特,当此比特取值为1时,表示当前PPDU的尾填充部分包括第一Color,此时,接收设备需要去识别第一Color,或者需要将PPDU的尾填充部分中与第一Color相对应的比特序列传给MAC层。For the present embodiment, there is an indication that the tail padding portion for indicating the PPDU includes the first Color. For example, the presence indicator is 1 bit in the PPDU. When the value of the bit is 1, the tail padding portion of the current PPDU includes the first color. At this time, the receiving device needs to identify the first color, or needs to fill the tail of the PPDU. The bit sequence corresponding to the first Color in the portion is passed to the MAC layer.
具体的在PPDU中携带存在指示的方法可参考后续的对携带存在指标的方法的描述。For a specific method for carrying the presence indication in the PPDU, reference may be made to the subsequent description of the method for carrying the presence indicator.
步骤705:接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 705: The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
发送设备向接收设备发送PPDU,经过上述步骤的执行,接收设备获取的PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识。The sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device. After the foregoing steps are performed, the PPDU acquired by the receiving device includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, a first color. It is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the sending device belongs.
其中,尾填充部分包括尾信息Tail、第一Color和校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和第一Color位于Tail之后,且第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion includes a tail information Tail, a first color, and a check field. In the tail padding portion, the check field and the first color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance at the receiving end.
步骤706:接收设备对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码。Step 706: The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and performs Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain.
因发送设备对PPDU的Data域进行了编码,接收设备为了获取到该PPDU上的第一Color等信息,接收设备需要对该Data域进行相应的译码操作。Because the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU, the receiving device needs to perform corresponding decoding operations on the Data field in order to obtain information such as the first Color on the PPDU.
具体来说,当接收设备接收到发送设备发送的该帧时,若该接收设备为legacy设备,则按照传统BCC进行译码,即忽略位于Tail之后的部分。若该接收设备为可执行本申请实施例的相应方法的设备,则接收设备的PHY对于Tail之前的部分(包括Tail在内)按照传统BCC进行译码,而对于Tail之后的部分按照Tail-biting BCC进行译码,并将两部分的译码结果都传给MAC层。对于Tail之后的部分的译码结果,也可由接收设备的PHY完成对Color的校验,若校验正确,PHY将Color传给MAC层。Specifically, when the receiving device receives the frame sent by the sending device, if the receiving device is a legacy device, the decoding is performed according to the traditional BCC, that is, the portion after the Tail is ignored. If the receiving device is a device that can perform the corresponding method in the embodiment of the present application, the PHY of the receiving device is decoded according to the traditional BCC for the part before the Tail (including the Tail), and the Tail-biting is followed for the part after the Tail. The BCC performs decoding and passes the decoded results of both parts to the MAC layer. For the decoding result of the part after the Tail, the verification of Color can also be completed by the PHY of the receiving device. If the verification is correct, the PHY transmits the Color to the MAC layer.
可选地,在PPDU中还包括指示PPDU包括第一Color的存在指示的方案中,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,方法还包括:接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;若PPDU包括存在指示,则接收设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。或者接收设备执行步骤707等后续步骤。若PPDU不包括存在指示,则接收设备不执行下文的后续步骤。其中,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示可在步骤706之后执行,也可以在步骤706之前执行,具体的实现方式可根据存在指示的具体形式决定。Optionally, in the solution that the PPDU further includes the indication that the PPDU includes the first color, the method further includes: before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU includes the presence indication If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 707 and the like. If the PPDU does not include a presence indication, the receiving device does not perform the subsequent steps below. The receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication may be performed after step 706, and may also be performed before step 706. The specific implementation manner may be determined according to the specific form of the presence indication.
步骤707:接收设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;若第一Color接收正 确,则接收设备执行步骤708。Step 707: The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly; if the first color receives positive Indeed, the receiving device performs step 708.
在Data域的尾填充部分包括CRC,该CRC即用于接收设备在接收该PPDU后,使用该CRC验证接收的第一Color是否接收正确,这样可提高本申请实施例的方法的执行可靠性。The tail padding portion of the Data field includes a CRC, which is used by the receiving device to verify whether the received first color is received correctly after receiving the PPDU, so that the execution reliability of the method in the embodiment of the present application can be improved.
具体来说,接收设备在MAC层或PHY,基于CRC计算第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则接收设备执行步骤708等后续步骤,否则不执行步骤708。Specifically, the receiving device calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC at the MAC layer or the PHY. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 708 and the like, otherwise step 708 is not performed.
步骤708:接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备执行步骤709。Step 708: The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 709.
其中,第二Color用于对接收设备所属的BSS进行标识,第二Color可存储在接收设备上,该第二Color的相关内容可参考上述对Color的相应描述。The second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, and the second color may be stored in the receiving device. The related content of the second color may refer to the corresponding description of the color.
接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同。若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定该PPDU承载的控制帧来自于该接收设备所属的BSS,否则,该接收设备确定该控制帧来自于非该接收设备所属的BSS,即判定该控制帧来自其它BSS。The receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, otherwise, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the receiving device belongs, that is, determining This control frame comes from other BSSs.
步骤709:接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。Step 709: The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
若第一Color和第二Color相同,接收设备可确定出该PPDU携带的控制帧来自于该接收设备所属的BSS。从而,该接收设备可执行与控制帧来自于该接收设备所属的BSS相关的操作。例如,接收设备确定该PPDU中的控制帧来自于该接收设备所属的BSS,该接收设备可根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置intra-NAV,但不改变regular-NAV,或者,接收设备根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,释放intra-NAV,但不改变regular-NAV。If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device may determine that the control frame carried by the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. Thereby, the receiving device can perform an operation related to the control frame from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. For example, the receiving device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs, and the receiving device can set the intra-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not change the regular-NAV, or the receiving device according to the control The CF-End carried by the frame releases the intra-NAV, but does not change the regular-NAV.
相应的,若PPDU中的第一Color和该接收设备预存的第二Color不相同,则接收设备确定该PPDU中的控制帧不是来自于该接收设备所属的BSS。从而,接收设备可根据该控制帧携带的Duration设置regular-NAV,但不改变intra-NAV,或者,根据该控制帧携带的CF-End,仅释放regular-NAV。Correspondingly, if the first color in the PPDU is different from the second color pre-stored by the receiving device, the receiving device determines that the control frame in the PPDU is not from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. Therefore, the receiving device can set the regular-NAV according to the Duration carried by the control frame, but does not change the intra-NAV, or only releases the regular-NAV according to the CF-End carried by the control frame.
2)Pad bits部分采用传统BCC编码2) The Pad bits part uses the traditional BCC code.
针对图7所示的实施例中引入新的编码方式导致设备复杂度提升的缺点,本实施例提出,对于放置在原Pad bits位置的第一Color和CRC,与前面的SERVICE、PSUD一起采用传统BCC编码,如图11所示。其中,CRC至少是对第一Color的校验,且CRC和第一Color的前后顺序可交换。图11中Pad的含义与图7所示的实施例中的Pad的含义相同,但位置应位于第一Color和CRC之后且取值应为全0,这里不再赘述。For the disadvantage that the new coding mode is introduced in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 to cause the complexity of the device to be improved, this embodiment proposes that the traditional BCC is used together with the previous SERVICE and PSUD for the first Color and CRC placed at the original Pad bit position. Encoding, as shown in Figure 11. Wherein, the CRC is at least a check for the first color, and the CRC and the first color are exchanged in tandem. The meaning of Pad in FIG. 11 is the same as that of Pad in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but the position should be after the first Color and CRC and the value should be all 0, which will not be described again.
参阅图12,本申请实施例的方法包括:Referring to FIG. 12, the method in this embodiment of the present application includes:
步骤1201:发送设备获取第一Color。Step 1201: The sending device acquires the first Color.
第一Color用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识。The first color is used to identify the BSS to which the transmitting device belongs.
步骤1201可参考步骤701。Step 1201 can refer to step 701.
步骤1202:发送设备根据第一Color生成CRC。Step 1202: The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
CRC用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;The CRC is used by the receiving end to verify that Color is received correctly;
步骤1202可参考步骤702。Step 1202 can refer to step 702.
步骤1203:发送设备根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU。 Step 1203: The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field.
其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color和校验字段。尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和CRC位于Tail之后,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color and a check field. The tail padding part also includes the tail information Tail. The first Color and the CRC are located after the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
例如,发送设备在生成PPDU时,将第一Color和CRC填充进PPDU的尾填充部分,且在该尾填充部分,第一Color和CRC位于Tail之后。该Tail用于提高接收端BCC译码性能。For example, when the transmitting device generates the PPDU, the first Color and the CRC are filled into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, and in the tail padding portion, the first Color and the CRC are located after the Tail. The Tail is used to improve the decoding performance of the BCC at the receiving end.
在本申请的一些实施例中,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。在本申请有的实施例中,CRC还可以进一步对Pad进行校验。In some embodiments of the present application, the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence. In some embodiments of the present application, the CRC may further verify the Pad.
因Pad Bits部分在原来的标准中约定为全零序列,故,在本申请的实施例中,将Pad部分设定为全零序列,在Pad部分可不用对原来的填充方式进行改变,且在接收端还可以将Pad视为Tail进行译码,即相当于增加了Tail的长度,有利于增加数据尾部比特的译码正确概率。该处,具体与Viterbi译码算法有关。Since the Pad Bits part is assumed to be an all-zero sequence in the original standard, in the embodiment of the present application, the Pad part is set to the all-zero sequence, and the original filling mode can be changed in the Pad part, and The receiving end can also decode the Pad as a Tail, which is equivalent to increasing the length of the Tail, which is beneficial to increasing the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits. This is specifically related to the Viterbi decoding algorithm.
可以理解,在本申请有的实施例中,Pad bits部分也可以不包括Pad。It can be understood that, in some embodiments of the present application, the Pad bits portion may not include the Pad.
其中,发送设备生成PPDU的方法,可参考上述设备生成PPDU的描述,以及上述步骤703的相关描述。只是,在本申请实施例的方法中,发送设备在Tail之后,将第一Color和CRC填充进PPDU的尾填充部分,其中,CRC至少是对第一Color的校验。并且,与图7所示的实施例相比较,在本申请的实施例中,在尾填充部分,CRC和第一Color的前后顺序可交换。For the method for generating a PPDU by the sending device, refer to the description of the PPDU generated by the foregoing device, and the related description of step 703 above. However, in the method of the embodiment of the present application, after the Tail, the transmitting device fills the first color and the CRC into the tail padding portion of the PPDU, where the CRC is at least a check for the first color. Also, in comparison with the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, in the embodiment of the present application, in the tail padding portion, the order of the CRC and the first Color can be exchanged.
步骤1204:发送设备对Data域进行BCC编码。Step 1204: The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
发送设备在发送PPDU之前,发送设备的PHY对该PPDU的Data域进行编码,其中对于放置在原Pad bits位置的第一Color和CRC,与前面的SERVICE域、PSUD域一起采用传统的BCC编码。Before transmitting the PPDU, the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU, and uses the traditional BCC encoding together with the previous SERVICE domain and the PSUD domain for the first Color and CRC placed in the original Pad bit position.
通过上述步骤的执行,发送设备产生了携带控制帧的PPDU,从而,发送设备向接收设备发送该PPDU后,接收设备可根据该PPDU携带的第一Color进行来源判定,根据第一Color判断该PPDU承载的控制帧是否来源于接收设备所属的BSS。对此详见下述的描述。After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame. After the sending device sends the PPDU to the receiving device, the receiving device may perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, and determine the PPDU according to the first color. Whether the bearer control frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. See the description below for details.
在本申请的一些实施例中,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color。In some embodiments of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first Color.
为了使得接收设备获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,接收设备的PHY可以决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层,发送设备可以在PPDU中增加存在指示,接收设备在获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,可以根据该存在指示判断是否去识别该PPDU中的第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层。After the receiving device obtains the PPDU sent by the sending device, the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU. The presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer.
具体的在PPDU中携带存在指示的方法可参考后续的对携带存在指标的方法的描述。For a specific method for carrying the presence indication in the PPDU, reference may be made to the subsequent description of the method for carrying the presence indicator.
步骤1205:接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 1205: The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
通过上述步骤的执行,接收设备可接收发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部 分包括第一Color和校验字段,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识。该尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Through the execution of the foregoing steps, the receiving device may receive the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device. The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail padding unit. The minute includes a first Color and a check field, and the first Color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the transmitting device belongs. The tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
在本申请的一些实施例中,该尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。In some embodiments of the present application, the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
步骤1206:接收设备对Data域进行BCC译码。Step 1206: The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
相应于步骤1204中,发送设备按照BCC对Data域进行编码,接收设备还要对获取的PPDU的Data域采用BCC进行译码,从而得到Data域的第一Color、CRC等信息。Corresponding to the step 1204, the sending device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the receiving device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first Color and CRC of the Data field.
具体来说,接收设备的PHY对整个Data域按照传统BCC译码,Pad bits译码结果也需传给MAC层。这与现有技术中发送端和接收端对PPDU的Data域的处理方法是一致的,因此不会带来设备复杂度的提升。Specifically, the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the conventional BCC, and the decoding result of the Pad bits also needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer. This is consistent with the processing method of the Data field of the PPDU by the sender and the receiver in the prior art, and thus does not bring about an increase in device complexity.
可选地,在PPDU中设置用于指示PPDU包括第一Color的存在指示的实施例中,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,本实施例的方法还包括:接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;若PPDU包括存在指示,则接收设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。或者执行步骤1207,否则接收设备不执行下文中的后续步骤,这样,即提高了本申请实施例的执行效率。Optionally, in an embodiment where the PPDU is configured to indicate that the PPDU includes the presence indication of the first color, the method of the embodiment further includes: the receiving device, before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. Determining whether the PPDU includes a presence indication; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or step 1207 is performed, otherwise the receiving device does not perform the following steps in the following, thus improving the execution efficiency of the embodiment of the present application.
其中,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示可在步骤1206之后执行,也可以在步骤1206之前执行,具体的实现方式可根据存在指示的具体形式决定。The receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication may be performed after step 1206, and may also be performed before step 1206. The specific implementation manner may be determined according to the specific form of the presence indication.
步骤1207:接收设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;若第一Color接收正确,则接收设备执行步骤1208。Step 1207: The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first Color is received correctly. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs step 1208.
在Data域的尾填充部分包括CRC,该CRC即用于接收设备在接收该PPDU后,使用该CRC验证接收的第一Color是否接收正确,从而提高了本申请实施例的方法的可靠性。The tail padding portion of the Data field includes a CRC, which is used by the receiving device to verify whether the received first color is received correctly after receiving the PPDU, thereby improving the reliability of the method in the embodiment of the present application.
具体来说,接收设备在MAC层或PHY,基于CRC计算第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则接收设备执行步骤1208等后续步骤,否则不执行步骤1208。Specifically, the receiving device calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC at the MAC layer or the PHY. If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs the subsequent steps of step 1208 and the like, otherwise step 1208 is not performed.
步骤1208:接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备执行步骤1209。Step 1208: The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1209.
第二Color用于对接收设备所属的BSS进行标识。The second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
步骤1208可参考步骤708。Step 1208 can refer to step 708.
步骤1209:接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。Step 1209: The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
步骤1209可参考步骤709。Step 1209 can refer to step 709.
3)填充部分采用传统BCC,但不包含CRC3) The padding part uses the traditional BCC but does not contain the CRC
基于图12所示的实施例,为了进一步提高第一Color的传输可靠性,本实施例提出,利用原本放置Pad bits的位置承载第一Color,但不包含CRC,如图13所示的帧结构示意图。之所以不添加CRC,主要是因为,PSDU中包含对PSDU的校验,例如,RTS/CTS/ACK帧中的帧校验序列(Frame Check Sequence;FCS)域,并且PSDU的长度远大于第一Color,故当PSDU校验正确时,第一Color也以极大的概率正确。例如,RTS帧的PSDU 长度为22bytes=176bits,CTS/ACK帧的PSDU长度为112bits,均远大于Color的6bits。Based on the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, in order to further improve the transmission reliability of the first color, this embodiment proposes to use the location where the pad bits are originally placed to carry the first color, but does not include the CRC, as shown in FIG. schematic diagram. The reason why the CRC is not added is mainly because the PSDU includes a check for the PSDU, for example, a Frame Check Sequence (FCS) field in the RTS/CTS/ACK frame, and the length of the PSDU is much larger than the first. Color, so when the PSDU check is correct, the first Color is also correct with great probability. For example, the PSDU of an RTS frame The length is 22 bytes = 176 bits, and the PSDU length of the CTS/ACK frame is 112 bits, which is much larger than the 6 bits of Color.
如图13所示,由于控制帧原本的Pad bits至少10bits,故Pad的长度大于等于4bits。Pad亦可看做Tail,故应填0,接收端利用Pad能够有效提高第一Color的正确接收概率。这样,本实施例方案比图12所示的实施例的方案的第一Color的传输可靠性更高。As shown in FIG. 13, since the original Pad bits of the control frame are at least 10 bits, the length of the Pad is greater than or equal to 4 bits. Pad can also be regarded as Tail, so it should be filled in 0. The receiving end can effectively improve the correct receiving probability of the first color by using Pad. Thus, the scheme of the present embodiment has higher transmission reliability than the first Color of the scheme of the embodiment shown in FIG.
本申请实施例的具体执行过程,可参考图12所示的实施例,只是在本申请实施例中,PPDU不包括CRC,从而,本申请实施例的方法也就不用执行与CRC相关的步骤,例如,发送设备不用执行步骤1202,也不用将该CRC填充进尾填充部分,接收设备也不用执行步骤1207。相应的,本申请实施例的帧结构为图13所示的帧结构。For the specific implementation process of the embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the embodiment shown in FIG. 12, except that in the embodiment of the present application, the PPDU does not include the CRC, and thus the method in the embodiment of the present application does not need to perform the steps related to the CRC. For example, the transmitting device does not need to perform step 1202, nor does it need to fill the CRC into the tail padding portion, and the receiving device does not need to perform step 1207. Correspondingly, the frame structure of the embodiment of the present application is the frame structure shown in FIG.
4)尾填充部分用Color+CRC+Tail+Pad取代Tail+Pad bits4) The tail fill part replaces Tail+Pad bits with Color+CRC+Tail+Pad
为保证第一Color具有与PSDU部分完全相同的可靠性,并且第一Color的接收正确与否可被验证,本实施例提出,对于legacy PPDU格式控制帧中的尾填充部分,即Tail+Pad bits部分(共16+x bits),用第一Color(6bits)、CRC(4bits)、Tail(6bits)以及可能存在的Pad(x bits)替代,如图14所示。其中,整个Data域信道编码方式不变,即采用传统BCC编码。In order to ensure that the first color has the same reliability as the PSDU part, and the reception of the first color is correct or not, this embodiment proposes that the tail padding part in the legacy PPDU format control frame, that is, Tail+Pad bits Part (16+x bits total), replaced by the first Color (6bits), CRC (4bits), Tail (6bits) and possibly existing Pad (x bits), as shown in Figure 14. The channel coding mode of the entire Data domain is unchanged, that is, the traditional BCC coding is adopted.
参考图15,本申请实施例的方法包括:Referring to FIG. 15, the method in this embodiment of the present application includes:
步骤1501:发送设备获取第一Color。Step 1501: The sending device acquires the first Color.
第一Color用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识。The first color is used to identify the BSS to which the transmitting device belongs.
步骤1501可参考步骤701。Step 1501 can refer to step 701.
步骤1502:发送设备根据第一Color生成CRC。Step 1502: The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
CRC用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。The CRC is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly.
步骤1502可参考步骤702。Step 1502 can refer to step 702.
步骤1503:发送设备根据第一Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 1503: The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field.
其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color和CRC。尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和CRC位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first Color and a CRC. The tail padding part also includes the tail information Tail, the first Color and the CRC are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
在本申请的一些实施例中,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。In some embodiments of the present application, the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
其中,第一Color和CRC的前后顺序可以互换,但Tail必位于第一Color和CRC之后。该CRC至少是对第一Color的校验。Pad的含义与图7所示的实施例的Pad的含义相同,但Pad的位置应位于Tail之后且取值应为全0,当Pad bits为10bits时,Pad的长度x=0,即Pad不存在。The order of the first Color and the CRC may be interchanged, but the Tail must be after the first Color and the CRC. The CRC is at least a check for the first Color. The meaning of Pad is the same as that of Pad in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, but the position of Pad should be after Tail and the value should be all 0. When Pad bits are 10 bits, the length of Pad is x=0, that is, Pad is not presence.
其中,发送设备生成PPDU的方法,可参考上述相应部分的描述,只是,在本申请实施例的方法中,发送设备在生成承载控制帧的PPDU时,将第一Color和CRC填充进PPDU的尾填充部分,且第一Color和CRC位于Tail之前。For the method for generating a PPDU by the sending device, refer to the description of the corresponding part. However, in the method of the embodiment of the present application, the sending device fills the first color and the CRC into the end of the PPDU when generating the PPDU carrying the control frame. The portion is filled, and the first Color and CRC are located before the Tail.
具体来说,为实现本实施例的方案,发送设备的MAC层在将PSDU传给PHY的同时,还需将Color和CRC作为原语参数TXVECTOR的元素,通过PHY-TXSTART.request原语传给PHY。当PHY发现来自MAC的TXVECTOR中包含第一Color和CRC这两个元素时, 对于PSDU不再是先添加Tail再添加Pad bits,而是按照本实施例的方案进行处理。之后,PHY对于Data域的处理与传统发射机对于legacy PPDU中Data域的处理完全相同。Specifically, to implement the solution of the embodiment, the MAC layer of the sending device needs to transmit the PSDU to the PHY, and also needs to pass the Color and CRC as elements of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR to the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive. PHY. When the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC contains the first element of Color and CRC, For the PSDU, it is no longer necessary to add the Tail first and then add the Pad bits, but to process according to the scheme of the embodiment. Thereafter, the processing of the Data field by the PHY is identical to that of the legacy transmitter for the Data field in the legacy PPDU.
步骤1504:发送设备对Data域进行BCC编码。Step 1504: The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
发送设备在发送PPDU之前,发送设备的PHY对该PPDU的Data域进行编码,具体是采用BCC对Data域进行编码。Before the sending device sends the PPDU, the PHY of the sending device encodes the Data field of the PPDU, specifically, the BCC is used to encode the Data field.
通过上述步骤的执行,发送设备产生了携带控制帧的PPDU,从而,发送设备向接收设备发送PPDU,接收设备可根据该PPDU携带的第一Color进行来源判定,根据第一Color判断该PPDU的控制帧是否来源于接收设备所属的BSS。After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, and the receiving device can perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, and determine the control of the PPDU according to the first color. Whether the frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
在本申请的一些实施例中,该PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。在PPDU中携带存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。In some embodiments of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color. The presence indication is carried in the PPDU, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
具体的在PPDU中携带存在指示的方法可参考后续的对携带存在指标的方法的描述。For a specific method for carrying the presence indication in the PPDU, reference may be made to the subsequent description of the method for carrying the presence indicator.
发送设备对Data域进行BCC编码后,发送设备即可向接收设备发送该PPDU。After the sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data field, the sending device can send the PPDU to the receiving device.
步骤1505:接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 1505: The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
通过发送设备执行上述步骤,接收设备获取的该PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;尾填充部分还包括校验字段。尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,或者,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Performing the above steps by the sending device, the PPDU acquired by the receiving device includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to belong to the sending device. The basic service set BSS is identified; the tail padding portion also includes a check field. The tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
在本申请的一些实施例中,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。In some embodiments of the present application, the end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
步骤1506:接收设备对Data域进行BCC译码。Step 1506: The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
相应于步骤1504中,发送设备按照BCC对Data域进行编码,发送设备还要对获取的PPDU的Data域采用BCC进行译码,从而得到Data域的第一Color、CRC等信息。Corresponding to the step 1504, the sending device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the transmitting device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first Color and CRC of the Data field.
具体来说,接收设备的PHY对整个Data域按照传统BCC译码,Pad bits译码结果也需传给MAC层。这与现有技术中发送端和接收端对PPDU的Data域的处理方法是一致的,因此不会带来设备复杂度的提升。Specifically, the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the conventional BCC, and the decoding result of the Pad bits also needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer. This is consistent with the processing method of the Data field of the PPDU by the sender and the receiver in the prior art, and thus does not bring about an increase in device complexity.
Legacy设备接收legacy PPDU格式并对Data域做BCC译码时,解码器可能利用Tail为全0序列的已知知识,但是,解码器也有可能不利用Tail为全0序列的已知知识进行辅助译码。解码器是否利用Tail为全0序列的已知知识进行辅助译码,完全取决于设备内部实现。如果legacy设备采用后者的译码方式,则本实施例提出的PPDU填充方式不会对legacy设备的接收造成影响。When the legacy device receives the legacy PPDU format and performs BCC decoding on the Data field, the decoder may use Tail as the known knowledge of the all-zero sequence. However, the decoder may also use the known knowledge of the full-zero sequence for the auxiliary translation. code. Whether the decoder uses Tail to assist the decoding of the known knowledge of the all-zero sequence depends entirely on the internal implementation of the device. If the legacy device uses the latter decoding mode, the PPDU filling method proposed in this embodiment does not affect the reception of the legacy device.
可选地,在PPDU设置用于指示PPDU包括第一Color的存在指示的实施例中,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,方法还包括:接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;若PPDU包括存在指示,则接收设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。或者执行步骤1507,否则接收设备不执行下文中的后续步骤,这样,可提高本申请实施例的执行效率。Optionally, in an embodiment where the PPDU is configured to indicate that the PPDU includes the presence indication of the first color, before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU includes the presence The indication; if the PPDU includes the presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. Or step 1507 is performed, otherwise the receiving device does not perform the following steps in the following, so that the execution efficiency of the embodiment of the present application can be improved.
步骤1507:接收设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收 正确,则接收设备执行步骤1508。Step 1507: The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly. If the first color receives If so, the receiving device performs step 1508.
步骤1507可参考步骤707。Step 1507 can refer to step 707.
步骤1508:接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备执行步骤1509。Step 1508: The receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same. If the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1509.
第二Color用于对接收设备所属的BSS进行标识。The second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
步骤1509:接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。Step 1509: The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
步骤1509可参考步骤709。Step 1509 can refer to step 709.
上述的4个实施例为“将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的尾填充部分”的具体实现实施例。The above four embodiments are specific implementation embodiments of "filling Color into the tail-filled portion of the Data field of the PPDU".
综上所述,发送设备获取用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识的第一Color后,发送设备根据该第一Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,然后,发送设备向接收设备发送PPDU,以使接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。然后,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非接收设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, after the sending device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the sending device belongs, the sending device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes the PSDU field and the tail. The padding part, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding part includes a first color. Then, the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device. Then, the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the same The BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-receiving device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
下面对“将Color填充进PPDU的Data域中的SERVICE域”举出其中一个具体实施例。The following is a specific embodiment of "the SERVICE field in the Data field in which Color is populated into the PPDU".
5)SERVICE承载Color,Pad bits承载CRC5) SERVICE carries Color, and Pad bits carry CRC.
为保证Color具有与PSDU部分完全相同的可靠性,并且Color的接收正确与否可被验证,同时不影响legacy设备对于PSUD的接收,本实施例提出利用SERVICE域的9bits保留位中的6bits承载Color,同时用原本Pad bits中的10bits承载Color的CRC(4bits)和Tail(6bits)。为便于区分,PSDU的Tail称为第一Tail(Tail1),CRC之后的Tail称为第二Tail(Tail2),如图16所示。Tail2为全0序列。由于CRC之后还有6bits的Tail2,故CRC的可靠性与SERVICE以及PSDU部分完全相同。In order to ensure that Color has the same reliability as the PSDU part, and whether the reception of Color is correct or not, and does not affect the reception of the legacy device by the legacy device, this embodiment proposes to use the 6bits in the 9bits reserved bits of the SERVICE field to carry the Color. At the same time, the CRC (4bits) and Tail (6bits) of Color are carried by 10bits in the original Pad bits. To facilitate differentiation, the TSUL of the PSDU is called the first Tail (Tail1), and the Tail after the CRC is called the second Tail (Tail2), as shown in Figure 16. Tail2 is an all-zero sequence. Since there is 6bits of Tail2 after the CRC, the reliability of the CRC is exactly the same as the SERVICE and PSDU parts.
参考图17,本申请实施例的方法还包括:Referring to FIG. 17, the method in the embodiment of the present application further includes:
步骤1701:发送设备获取第一Color。Step 1701: The sending device acquires the first Color.
其中,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识。The first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs.
步骤1701可参考步骤701。Step 1701 can refer to step 701.
步骤1702:发送设备根据第一Color生成CRC。Step 1702: The sending device generates a CRC according to the first Color.
其中,校验字段CRC用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确。The check field CRC is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly.
步骤1702可参考步骤702。Step 1702 can refer to step 702.
步骤1703:发送设备根据第一Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU。 Step 1703: The sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the first Color and the check field.
其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段CRC。在本申请的实施例中,该尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、CRC和第二Tail,即Tail1、CRC和Tail2在尾填充部分中按照先后顺序依次排列。The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field CRC. In the embodiment of the present application, the tail padding portion sequentially includes the first tail information Tail, CRC, and the second Tail, that is, Tail1, CRC, and Tail2 are sequentially arranged in the tail padding portion in order.
第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。即,Tail1用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,Tail2用于提高校验字段CRC的BCC译码性能(即可靠性)。在本申请的实施例中,Tail2设定为全零序列,可以理解,Tail2也可以设定为其它的序列形式,只要Tail2是发送端和接收端共知的序列即可,例如接收端和发送端约定Tail2的具体形式。只要Tail2是发送端和接收端共知的序列,即可达到提高校验字段的可靠性的目的。在本申请实施例中,发送端为发送设备,接收端是接收设备。The first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field on the receiving end. That is, Tail1 is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end, and Tail2 is used to improve the BCC decoding performance (ie, reliability) of the check field CRC. In the embodiment of the present application, Tail2 is set to an all-zero sequence. It can be understood that Tail2 can also be set to other sequence forms, as long as Tail2 is a sequence known to the sender and the receiver, such as the receiver and the sender. The specific form of Tail2 is agreed upon. As long as Tail2 is a well-known sequence between the sender and the receiver, the reliability of the check field can be improved. In the embodiment of the present application, the sending end is a sending device, and the receiving end is a receiving device.
在本申请有的实施例中,该尾填充部分的末端还包括Pad。In some embodiments of the present application, the end of the tail-filling portion further includes a Pad.
图16中的Pad的含义与图7所示的实施例的Pad的含义相同,但位置应位于Tail2之后且取值应为全0。因Pad Bits部分在原来的标准中约定为零序列,故,在本申请的实施例中,将Pad部分设定为全零序列,在Pad部分可不用对原来的填充方式进行改变,且在接收端还可以将Pad视为Tail进行译码,即相当于增加了Tail的长度,有利于增加数据尾部比特的译码正确概率。该处,具体与Viterbi译码算法有关。The meaning of Pad in Fig. 16 is the same as that of Pad in the embodiment shown in Fig. 7, but the position should be after Tail2 and the value should be all zeros. Since the Pad Bits part is a zero sequence in the original standard, in the embodiment of the present application, the Pad part is set to the all-zero sequence, and the original padding mode can be changed in the Pad part, and is received. The terminal can also decode the Pad as a Tail, which is equivalent to increasing the length of the Tail, which is beneficial to increasing the correct probability of decoding the data tail bits. This is specifically related to the Viterbi decoding algorithm.
可以理解,当Pad bits恰好为10bits时,Pad的长度为0,即不存在Pad域。It can be understood that when the Pad bits is exactly 10 bits, the length of the Pad is 0, that is, there is no Pad field.
步骤1704:发送设备对Data域进行BCC编码。Step 1704: The sending device performs BCC encoding on the Data domain.
发送设备对图16所示的整个Data域采用BCC进行信道编码。The transmitting device performs channel coding on the entire Data field shown in FIG. 16 using BCC.
具体来说,为实现本申请实施例的方法,发送设备的MAC层将PSDU传给PHY的同时,还需将Color和CRC作为原语参数TXVECTOR的元素,通过PHY-TXSTART.request原语传给PHY。当PHY发现来自MAC的TXVECTOR中包含第一Color和CRC这两个元素时,在填充Pad bits时将前4比特填CRC而不再是填0,同时用SERVICE中6bits保留位承载第一Color。之后,PHY对整个Data域进行传统BCC编码。Specifically, in order to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application, the MAC layer of the sending device transmits the PSDU to the PHY, and also needs to pass the Color and CRC as elements of the primitive parameter TXVECTOR to the PHY-TXSTART.request primitive. PHY. When the PHY finds that the TXVECTOR from the MAC contains the first element of Color and CRC, the first 4 bits are filled with CRC instead of 0 when padding the Pad bits, and the first Color is carried by the 6 bits reserved bit in SERVICE. The PHY then performs traditional BCC encoding on the entire Data field.
通过上述步骤的执行,发送设备产生了携带控制帧的PPDU,从而,发送设备向接收设备发送PPDU,接收设备可根据该PPDU携带的第一Color进行来源判定,即根据第一Color判断该PPDU的控制帧是否来源于接收设备所属的BSS。具体可参考下述的方法的描述。After the foregoing steps are performed, the sending device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame, so that the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, and the receiving device can perform source determination according to the first color carried by the PPDU, that is, the PPDU is determined according to the first color. Whether the control frame originates from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs. For details, refer to the description of the method described below.
在本申请的一些实施例中,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color。In some embodiments of the present application, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first Color.
对此的描述,详见下述的相关内容。For a description of this, see the related content below.
步骤1705:接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。Step 1705: The receiving device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the sending device.
通过发送设备执行上述的步骤,接收设备接收到该发送设备发送的PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。 The transmitting device performs the foregoing steps, and the receiving device receives the PPDU sent by the sending device, including a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a first Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding. The part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the sending device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
在本申请的实施例中,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段CRC的BCC译码性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail, and the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU parts at the receiving end, and the second Tail is used. In order to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field CRC of the receiving end.
步骤1706:接收设备对Data域进行BCC译码。Step 1706: The receiving device performs BCC decoding on the Data domain.
相应于步骤1704中,接收设备按照BCC对Data域进行编码,接收设备还要对获取的PPDU的Data域采用BCC进行译码,从而得到Data域的第一Color、CRC等信息。Corresponding to the step 1704, the receiving device encodes the Data field according to the BCC, and the receiving device further decodes the Data field of the acquired PPDU by using the BCC, thereby obtaining information such as the first color and the CRC of the Data field.
具体来说,当接收设备接收到该PPDU时,若该接收设备为legacy设备,则按照传统BCC进行译码,即忽略位于Tail1之后的部分。若该设备为执行本申请实施例的设备,则接收设备的PHY对整个Data域按照传统BCC进行译码后,将SERVICE中Color对应的6bits和Pad bits中前4bits(对应CRC)都传给MAC层,MAC层基于CRC计算第一Color是否接收正确。当然,也可由接收设备的PHY完成对Color的校验,若校验正确,PHY将Color传给MAC层。Specifically, when the receiving device receives the PPDU, if the receiving device is a legacy device, the decoding is performed according to the traditional BCC, that is, the portion after the Tail1 is ignored. If the device is a device that performs the embodiment of the present application, the PHY of the receiving device decodes the entire Data field according to the traditional BCC, and then transmits the 6 bits corresponding to the Color in the SERVICE and the first 4 bits (corresponding to the CRC) in the Pad bits to the MAC. Layer, the MAC layer calculates whether the first Color is received correctly based on the CRC. Of course, the verification of Color can also be completed by the PHY of the receiving device. If the verification is correct, the PHY transmits Color to the MAC layer.
步骤1707:接收设备基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;若第一Color接收正确,则接收设备执行步骤1708。Step 1707: The receiving device determines, according to the check field, whether the first Color is received correctly; if the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device performs step 1708.
步骤1708:接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同。若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备执行步骤1709。Step 1708: The receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same. If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the receiving device performs step 1709.
第二Color用于对接收设备所属的BSS进行标识。The second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
若第一Color接收正确,则接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同。If the first Color is received correctly, the receiving device determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
步骤1708可参考步骤708。Step 1708 can refer to step 708.
步骤1709:接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。Step 1709: The receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS。If the first Color and the second Color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the receiving device belongs.
步骤1709可参考步骤708。Step 1709 can refer to step 708.
可选地,在PPDU可能包括用于指示PPDU包括第一Color的存在指示的实施例中,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,方法还包括:接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;若PPDU包括存在指示,则接收设备执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。Optionally, in an embodiment where the PPDU may include a presence indication for indicating that the PPDU includes the first color, before the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes: the receiving device determining whether the PPDU is included There is an indication; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the receiving device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
为了使得接收设备获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,接收设备的PHY可以决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层,发送设备可以在PPDU中增加存在指示,接收设备在获取到发送设备发送的PPDU后,可以根据该存在指示判断是否去识别该PPDU中的第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层。After the receiving device obtains the PPDU sent by the sending device, the PHY of the receiving device may decide whether to identify the first color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer, and the sending device may add the PPDU. The presence indicator may, after obtaining the PPDU sent by the sending device, determine whether to identify the first color in the PPDU according to the presence indication, or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color to the MAC layer.
具体的在PPDU中携带存在指示的方法可参考后续的对填写存在指标的方法的描述。For a specific method for carrying the presence indication in the PPDU, reference may be made to the subsequent description of the method for filling in the presence indicator.
可以理解,因PSDU域远比SERVICE域长,在PPDU中有对PSDU域的校验,若PSDU域校验正确,则可认为接收的SERVICE域也是正确,即SERVICE域中携带的Color接收正确,从而在本申请有的实施例中,该PPDU可以不包括CRC和Tail2,相应的,此时发送设备可以不执行步骤1702,也不用向尾填充部分填充CRC和Tail2,而接收设备可以不用执行步骤1707。 It can be understood that, because the PSDU domain is far longer than the SERVICE domain, the PSDU domain is verified in the PPDU. If the PSDU domain is correctly verified, the received SERVICE domain is also correct, that is, the Color carried in the SERVICE domain is correctly received. Therefore, in an embodiment of the present application, the PPDU may not include the CRC and the Tail2. Correspondingly, the sending device may not perform step 1702, and does not need to fill the tail padding part with CRC and Tail2, and the receiving device may not perform steps. 1707.
可以理解,在本申请还有的实施例中,PPDU的尾填充部分包括CRC但不包括Tail2。此时,接收设备可基于CRC验证Color是否接收正确,但由于CRC之后没有Tail2,CRC传输相对容易出错。It can be understood that in still other embodiments of the present application, the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes CRC but does not include Tail2. At this time, the receiving device can verify whether Color is correctly received based on the CRC, but since there is no Tail2 after the CRC, the CRC transmission is relatively error-prone.
综上所述,发送设备获取用于对发送设备所属的BSS进行标识的第一Color后,发送设备根据该第一Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,该PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,Data域的SERVICE域包括第一Color,然后,发送设备向接收设备发送PPDU,以使接收设备获取发送设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。然后,接收设备判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对接收设备所属的BSS进行标识;若第一Color和第二Color相同,则接收设备确定该控制帧来自于接收设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非接收设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, after the sending device acquires the first color for identifying the BSS to which the sending device belongs, the sending device generates a PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the first color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a PSDU field and In the tail padding part, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the SERVICE field of the Data field includes a first color. Then, the sending device sends a PPDU to the receiving device, so that the receiving device acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the sending device. Then, the receiving device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the receiving device belongs; if the first color and the second color are the same, the receiving device determines that the control frame is from the The BSS to which the receiving device belongs; otherwise, the control frame of the PPDU is determined to be from the BSS to which the non-receiving device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
上述方法的执行,在有的实施例中,使用到了存在指示,下文为携带存在指标的方法的实施例,在该方法中将对该存在指示进行相应的描述,其中,该存在指示有多种的实现方式,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。可以理解,在上述不同的实施例中,可以对应于相应的不同的存在指示。Execution of the above method, in some embodiments, using an indication of presence, the following is an embodiment of a method of carrying a presence indicator, in which the presence indication is correspondingly described, wherein the presence indication has multiple The implementation of the present application does not specifically limit this. It will be appreciated that in the various embodiments described above, corresponding different presence indications may be corresponding.
由于接收设备的PHY并不识别PSDU包含的具体帧类型,因此,接收设备收到一个PPDU并在PHY层解出其SERVICE和Pad bits后,可以直接由PHY识别出其中是否包含第一Color,也可以将解出的比特序列传给MAC层,由MAC层识别其中是否包含第一Color。但在此之前,可以通过一些辅助措施帮助接收端PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将相应比特序列传给MAC层。例如,若标准规定本申请的方案仅用于CTS/ACK帧,则当接收端PHY发现收到的PPDU物理头的LENGTH域取值为14时,才认为该帧中可能包含Color,进而需要执行后续操作;若标准规定本申请的方案仅用于RTS帧和CTS/ACK帧,则当接收端PHY发现收到的PPDU物理头的LENGTH域取值为14或20时,才认为该帧中可能包含Color,进而需要执行后续操作。Since the PHY of the receiving device does not identify the specific frame type included in the PSDU, after receiving the PPDU and decoding its SERVICE and Pad bits in the PHY layer, the receiving device can directly identify whether the first color is included by the PHY. The solved bit sequence can be passed to the MAC layer, and the MAC layer identifies whether the first color is included. However, before this, some auxiliary measures can be taken to help the receiving PHY decide whether to identify the first Color or whether to transmit the corresponding bit sequence to the MAC layer. For example, if the standard specifies that the scheme of the present application is only used for a CTS/ACK frame, when the receiving PHY finds that the LENGTH field of the received PPDU physical header has a value of 14, the frame is considered to contain Color, and thus needs to be executed. Subsequent operation; if the standard stipulates that the scheme of the present application is only used for the RTS frame and the CTS/ACK frame, when the receiving PHY finds that the LENGTH field of the received PPDU physical header has a value of 14 or 20, it is considered that the frame may be Contains Color, which in turn requires subsequent operations.
在本申请有的实施例中,利用本申请方案所构造的承载控制帧的PPDU中,包含的存在指示,使得接收设备收到一个PPDU时,根据该PPDU上的存在指示能够判断该PPDU中是否包含了第一Color。存在指示可以是隐式的或者显式的,可以包含在PHY信息中,如L-SIG或SERVICE中,也可以包含在MAC层信息中。具体包括如下六种指示方法:In an embodiment of the present application, the PPDU carrying the control frame constructed by the solution of the present application includes the presence indication, so that when the receiving device receives a PPDU, it can determine whether the PPDU is included according to the presence indication on the PPDU. Contains the first Color. The presence indication may be implicit or explicit and may be included in the PHY information, such as L-SIG or SERVICE, or may be included in the MAC layer information. Specifically, the following six indication methods are included:
1、基于CRC判断1, based on CRC judgment
对于上述图7、图12和图15所示的实施例,可以直接以PPDU中的第一Color位置处的比特序列和CRC位置处的比特序列为存在指示,即发送设备在填充第一Color和CRC时,即是对存在指示的填充。在接收设备处,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示,具体的实现方式为接收设备根据接收到的PPDU的Pad bits中第一Color对应位置的比特序列计算对应校验值CRC,并与CRC对应位置的比特序列比较。若两者相同,则认为该PPDU 包含第一Color;否则,认为该帧不包含第一Color或第一Color接收错误。For the embodiments shown in FIG. 7, FIG. 12 and FIG. 15, the bit sequence at the first Color position and the bit sequence at the CRC position in the PPDU may be directly indicated as the presence, that is, the transmitting device is filling the first Color and At the time of CRC, it is the padding for the presence indication. At the receiving device, the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication. The specific implementation manner is that the receiving device calculates the corresponding check value CRC according to the bit sequence of the first Color corresponding position in the Pad bits of the received PPDU, and the corresponding position with the CRC. Bit sequence comparison. If the two are the same, the PPDU is considered Contains the first Color; otherwise, the frame is considered not to contain the first Color or the first Color receive error.
2、在L-SIG中指示2. Instructed in the L-SIG
在L-SIG中有1bit保留位,可以利用该保留位承载存在指示,表示当前PPDU中是否包括第一Color,如图18所示。例如,取值为1表示包括第一Color,0表示不包括第一Color。本方案适用于上述的1)至5)的实施例中的任一实施例。There is a 1-bit reserved bit in the L-SIG, and the reserved bit bearer presence indication can be used to indicate whether the first color is included in the current PPDU, as shown in FIG. 18. For example, a value of 1 indicates that the first color is included, and 0 indicates that the first color is not included. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 5) above.
例如,发送设备在PPDU中填充存在指示,具体为发送设备在PPDU中的L-SIG中的保留位填充1,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示具体为接收设备判断PPDU中的L-SIG中的保留位是否有填充1。For example, the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the reserved bit of the transmitting device in the L-SIG in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the L-SIG in the PPDU. Whether the reserved bit has padding 1.
3、在Frame Control域中指示3. Instruct in the Frame Control field
Frame Control(帧控制)域位于PSDU的起始位置,控制帧的Frame Control域中包含多个保留比特,如图19中虚线框中的比特。可以利用其中任一比特作为存在指示,表示当前PPDU中是否包括第一Color,例如,取值为1表示包括第一Color,0表示不包括Color。本方案适用于上述的1)至5)的实施例中的任一实施例。The Frame Control field is located at the beginning of the PSDU, and the Frame Control field of the control frame contains a plurality of reserved bits, such as the bits in the dotted box in FIG. Any one of the bits may be used as an indication of presence, indicating whether the first color is included in the current PPDU. For example, a value of 1 indicates that the first color is included, and 0 indicates that the color is not included. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 5) above.
例如,发送设备在PPDU中填充存在指示,具体为发送设备在PPDU中的Frame Control域中的预设保留比特填充1,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示具体为接收设备判断PPDU中的Frame Control域中的预设保留比特是否有填充1。For example, the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit padding of the sending device in the Frame Control field in the PPDU, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the Frame Control field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit in the pad has padding 1.
4、通过SERVICE域指示,并包含CRC4, through the SERVICE domain indication, and contains the CRC
SERVICE域中有9bit保留位,可以利用其中任一比特作为Color存在指示,表示当前PPDU中是否包括Color,例如,取值为1表示包括Color,0表示不包括Color。注意,由于SERVICE域中本身并没有被校验,故SERVICE域还应包括对Color存在指示的校验。例如,利用SERVICE域中4bits承载CRC,作为对Color存在指示的校验。本方案适用于上述的1)至4)的实施例中的任一实施例。There are 9bit reserved bits in the SERVICE field. You can use any of them as the Color presence indicator to indicate whether the current PPDU includes Color. For example, a value of 1 indicates that Color is included, and 0 indicates that Color is not included. Note that since the SERVICE field itself is not verified, the SERVICE field should also include a check for the presence of the Color indicator. For example, the CRC is carried by 4 bits in the SERVICE domain as a check for the presence of Color. This embodiment is applicable to any of the embodiments of 1) to 4) above.
例如,发送设备在PPDU中填充存在指示,具体为发送设备在PPDU中的SERVICE域中的预设保留位填充1,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示具体为接收设备判断PPDU中的SERVICE域中的预设保留位是否有填充1。For example, the sending device fills the PPDU with the presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit of the sending device in the SERVICE field in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the SERVICE field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit has padding 1.
5、通过SERVICE域指示,但SERVICE域中不包括CRC5, through the SERVICE domain indication, but the SERVICE domain does not include the CRC
针对实施例5),即图17所示的实施例,可以将Color(6bits)和存在指示(1bits)均包含在如图20所示的SERVICE域的保留位中,而第一Color和存在指示的CRC由Pad bits承载。For Embodiment 5), that is, the embodiment shown in FIG. 17, both Color (6 bits) and presence indication (1 bits) may be included in the reserved bits of the SERVICE field as shown in FIG. 20, and the first Color and presence indications The CRC is carried by the Pad bits.
例如,发送设备在PPDU中填充存在指示,具体为发送设备在PPDU中的SERVICE域中的预设保留位填充1,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示具体为接收设备判断PPDU中的SERVICE域中的预设保留位是否有填充1。For example, the sending device fills the PPDU with the presence indication, specifically, the preset reserved bit of the sending device in the SERVICE field in the PPDU is filled with 1, and the receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, the receiving device determines the SERVICE field in the PPDU. Whether the preset reserved bit has padding 1.
6、通过PSDU中的RA域指示6, through the RA domain indication in the PSDU
RA域位于PSDU中,即MAC部分,长度为48bits,用于承载接收设备地址。其中,RA的最高位表示当前RA是单播还是组播地址(Individual/Group),如图21所示。通常情况,RTS、CTS、ACK等控制帧的RA域应为单播地址,故Individual/Group设置为0。本方案提出,当Individual/Group设置为1时,表示当前PPDU中包含第一Color。即以 Individual/Group为1为存在指示。The RA field is located in the PSDU, that is, the MAC part, and has a length of 48 bits, and is used to carry the receiving device address. The highest bit of the RA indicates whether the current RA is a unicast or a multicast address (Individual/Group), as shown in FIG. 21. Normally, the RA field of the control frame such as RTS, CTS, and ACK should be a unicast address, so the Individual/Group is set to 0. This scheme proposes that when the Individual/Group is set to 1, it indicates that the current PPDU contains the first Color. That is Individual/Group is 1 for presence indication.
例如,发送设备在PPDU中填充存在指示,具体为发送设备将PPDU中的RA的最高位设置为1,接收设备判断PPDU是否包括存在指示具体为接收设备判断PPDU中的RA的最高位是否为1。For example, the sending device fills the PPDU with a presence indication, specifically, the sending device sets the highest bit of the RA in the PPDU to 1. The receiving device determines whether the PPDU includes the presence indication, specifically, whether the receiving device determines whether the highest bit of the RA in the PPDU is 1. .
可以理解,在携带存在指标的方法中,填充存在指示,可以是在生成PPDU时进行填充,也可以是在生成PPDU后进行填充。It can be understood that, in the method for carrying the presence indicator, the presence indication may be filled, or may be filled when the PPDU is generated, or may be filled after the PPDU is generated.
其中,上述举出的各个存在指示的示例,可应用在相应的实施例中,该存在指示的填充可以在发送设备生成PPDU时进行填充,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。通过该存在指示的提示,使得接收设备的PHY决定是否需要去识别第一Color,或者是否需要将第一Color的相应比特序列传给MAC层以进行识别。这样可提高接收设备执行本申请实施例提供的确定控制帧的BCC归属的方法的效率。For example, the foregoing examples of the presence indications may be applied to the corresponding embodiments. The padding of the presence indication may be filled when the sending device generates the PPDU, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. By the prompt of the presence indication, the PHY of the receiving device determines whether it is necessary to identify the first Color, or whether the corresponding bit sequence of the first Color needs to be transmitted to the MAC layer for identification. In this way, the efficiency of the method for determining the BCC attribution of the control frame provided by the receiving device in the embodiment of the present application is improved.
图22为本发明本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的设备的结构示意图,该设备可用于执行上述实施例1)至4)中的任一实施例的接收设备执行的方法。参阅图22,以该设备为第二设备进行描述,FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The device may be used to perform the method performed by the receiving device in any of the foregoing embodiments 1) to 4). Referring to FIG. 22, the device is described as a second device.
该第二设备包括:The second device includes:
获取单元2201,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;The acquiring unit 2201 is configured to obtain a PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding part includes a first color, where the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
第一判断单元2202,用于判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;The first determining unit 2202 is configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
确定单元2203,用于若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。The determining unit 2203 is configured to determine that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括校验字段,Optionally, the tail fill portion further includes a check field.
该第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
第二判断单元2204,用于基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;a second determining unit 2204, configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
若第一Color接收正确,则第一判断单元2202执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,或者,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and the check field are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
可选地,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。Optionally, the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail和校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和第一Color位于Tail之后,且第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;Optionally, the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field. In the tail padding portion, the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve the receiving. BCC decoding performance of the terminal;
该第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
译码单元2205,用于对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码;The decoding unit 2205 is configured to perform BCC decoding on the part before the Tail and the Tail in the Data domain, and perform Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain;
第三判断单元2206,用于基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确; The third determining unit 2206 is configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
若第一Color接收正确,则第一判断单元2202执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color;Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color;
该第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
第四判断单元2207,用于判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;The fourth determining unit 2207 is configured to determine whether the PPDU includes a presence indication.
若PPDU包括存在指示,则第一判断单元2202执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the first determining unit 2202 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
综上所述,获取单元2201获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识,然后,第一判断单元2202判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识,从而,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定单元2203确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the obtaining unit 2201 acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color. The first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the first determining unit 2202 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to belong to the second device. The BSS performs identification so that if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the determining unit 2203 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
图23为本申请实施例提供的一种设备的硬件结构示意图。如图23所示,为了便于说明,仅示出了与本申请实施例相关的部分,具体技术细节未揭示的,请参照本申请实施例方法部分。该终端可以为包括手机、平板电脑、PDA(Personal Digital Assistant,个人数字助理)、POS(Point of Sales,销售终端)、车载电脑等任意终端设备,以终端为手机为例:FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of hardware of a device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. As shown in FIG. 23, for the convenience of description, only the parts related to the embodiment of the present application are shown. For details of the technical details, please refer to the method part of the embodiment of the present application. The terminal may be any terminal device including a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant), a POS (Point of Sales), an in-vehicle computer, and the terminal is a mobile phone as an example:
图23示出的是与本申请实施例提供的终端相关的手机的部分结构的框图。参考图23,手机包括:射频(Radio Frequency,RF)电路2310、存储器2320、输入单元2330、显示单元2340、传感器2350、音频电路2360、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)模块2370、处理器2380、以及电源2390等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解,图23中示出的手机结构并不构成对手机的限定,可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a partial structure of a mobile phone related to a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG. 23, the mobile phone includes: a radio frequency (RF) circuit 2310, a memory 2320, an input unit 2330, a display unit 2340, a sensor 2350, an audio circuit 2360, a wireless fidelity (WiFi) module 2370, and a processor 2380. And power supply 2390 and other components. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the structure of the handset shown in FIG. 23 does not constitute a limitation to the handset, and may include more or less components than those illustrated, or some components may be combined, or different components may be arranged.
下面结合图23对手机的各个构成部件进行具体的介绍:The following describes the components of the mobile phone in detail with reference to FIG. 23:
RF电路2310可用于收发信息或通话过程中,信号的接收和发送,特别地,将基站的下行信息接收后,给处理器2380处理;另外,将设计上行的数据发送给基站。通常,RF电路2310包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器(Low Noise Amplifier,LNA)、双工器等。此外,RF电路2310还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议,包括但不限于全球移动通讯系统(Global System of Mobile communication,GSM)、通用分组无线服务(General Packet Radio SERVICE,GPRS)、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)、电子邮件、短消息服务(Short Messaging SERVICE,SMS)等。The RF circuit 2310 can be used for receiving and transmitting signals during the transmission or reception of information or during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, the processor 2380 processes the data. In addition, the uplink data is designed to be sent to the base station. Generally, RF circuit 2310 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), a duplexer, and the like. In addition, RF circuitry 2310 can also communicate with the network and other devices via wireless communication. The above wireless communication may use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to Global System of Mobile communication (GSM), General Packet Radio SERVICE (GPRS), Code Division Multiple Access (Code Division). Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), E-mail, Short Messaging SERVICE (SMS), and the like.
存储器2320可用于存储软件程序以及模块,处理器2380通过运行存储在存储器2320 的软件程序以及模块,从而执行手机的各种功能应用以及数据处理。存储器2320可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区,其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等;存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外,存储器2320可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 2320 can be used to store software programs and modules, and the processor 2380 is stored in the memory 2320 by running. Software programs and modules to perform various functional applications and data processing of the mobile phone. The memory 2320 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area, wherein the storage program area may store an operating system, an application required for at least one function (such as a sound playing function, an image playing function, etc.), and the like; the storage data area may be stored according to Data created by the use of the mobile phone (such as audio data, phone book, etc.). Further, the memory 2320 may include a high speed random access memory, and may also include a nonvolatile memory such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
输入单元2330可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息,以及产生与手机的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。具体地,输入单元2330可包括触控面板2331以及其他输入设备2332。触控面板2331,也称为触摸屏,可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板2331上或在触控面板2331附近的操作),并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。可选的,触控面板2331可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其中,触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位,并检测触摸操作带来的信号,将信号传送给触摸控制器;触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息,并将它转换成触点坐标,再送给处理器2380,并能接收处理器2380发来的命令并加以执行。此外,可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板2331。除了触控面板2331,输入单元2330还可以包括其他输入设备2332。具体地,其他输入设备2332可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种。The input unit 2330 can be configured to receive input numeric or character information and to generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function controls of the handset. Specifically, the input unit 2330 may include a touch panel 2331 and other input devices 2332. The touch panel 2331, also referred to as a touch screen, can collect touch operations on or near the user (such as a user using a finger, a stylus, or the like on the touch panel 2331 or near the touch panel 2331. Operation), and drive the corresponding connecting device according to a preset program. Optionally, the touch panel 2331 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller. Wherein, the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, and detects a signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device, converts the touch information into contact coordinates, and sends the touch information. The processor 2380 is provided and can receive commands from the processor 2380 and execute them. In addition, the touch panel 2331 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves. In addition to the touch panel 2331, the input unit 2330 may also include other input devices 2332. Specifically, other input devices 2332 may include, but are not limited to, one or more of a physical keyboard, function keys (such as volume control buttons, switch buttons, etc.), trackballs, mice, joysticks, and the like.
显示单元2340可用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息以及手机的各种菜单。显示单元2340可包括显示面板2341,可选的,可以采用液晶显示器(Liquid Crystal Display,LCD)、有机发光二极管(Organic Light-Emitting Diode,OLED)等形式来配置显示面板2341。进一步的,触控面板2331可覆盖显示面板2341,当触控面板2331检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后,传送给处理器2380以确定触摸事件的类型,随后处理器2380根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板2341上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图23中,触控面板2331与显示面板2341是作为两个独立的部件来实现手机的输入和输入功能,但是在某些实施例中,可以将触控面板2331与显示面板2341集成而实现手机的输入和输出功能。The display unit 2340 can be used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user as well as various menus of the mobile phone. The display unit 2340 can include a display panel 2341. Alternatively, the display panel 2341 can be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), or the like. Further, the touch panel 2331 may cover the display panel 2341. When the touch panel 2331 detects a touch operation on or near the touch panel 2331, the touch panel 2331 transmits to the processor 2380 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 2380 according to the touch event. The type provides a corresponding visual output on display panel 2341. Although the touch panel 2331 and the display panel 2341 are used as two independent components to implement the input and input functions of the mobile phone in FIG. 23, in some embodiments, the touch panel 2331 and the display panel 2341 may be integrated. Realize the input and output functions of the phone.
手机还可包括至少一种传感器2350,比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。具体地,光传感器可包括环境光传感器及接近传感器,其中,环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板2341的亮度,接近传感器可在手机移动到耳边时,关闭显示面板2341和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种,加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小,静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向,可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等;至于手机还可配置的陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器,在此不再赘述。The handset can also include at least one type of sensor 2350, such as a light sensor, motion sensor, and other sensors. Specifically, the light sensor may include an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor, wherein the ambient light sensor may adjust the brightness of the display panel 2341 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor may close the display panel 2341 and/or when the mobile phone moves to the ear. Or backlight. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes). When it is stationary, it can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity. It can be used to identify the gesture of the mobile phone (such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, related Game, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for the mobile phone can also be configured with gyroscopes, barometers, hygrometers, thermometers, infrared sensors and other sensors, no longer Narration.
音频电路2360、扬声器2361,传声器2362可提供用户与手机之间的音频接口。音频电路2360可将接收到的音频数据转换后的电信号,传输到扬声器2361,由扬声器2361转换为声音信号输出;另一方面,传声器2362将收集的声音信号转换为电信号,由音频电路 2360接收后转换为音频数据,再将音频数据输出处理器2380处理后,经RF电路2310以发送给比如另一手机,或者将音频数据输出至存储器2320以便进一步处理。An audio circuit 2360, a speaker 2361, and a microphone 2362 can provide an audio interface between the user and the handset. The audio circuit 2360 can transmit the converted electrical data of the received audio data to the speaker 2361, and convert it into a sound signal output by the speaker 2361; on the other hand, the microphone 2362 converts the collected sound signal into an electrical signal by the audio circuit. The 2360 is converted to audio data after reception, and then processed by the audio data output processor 2380, transmitted to the other mobile phone via the RF circuit 2310, or outputted to the memory 2320 for further processing.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术,手机通过WiFi模块2370可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等,它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图23示出了WiFi模块2370,但是可以理解的是,其并不属于手机的必须构成,完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-range wireless transmission technology. The mobile phone can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages and access streaming media through the WiFi module 2370. It provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although FIG. 23 shows the WiFi module 2370, it can be understood that it does not belong to the essential configuration of the mobile phone, and may be omitted as needed within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
处理器2380是手机的控制中心,利用各种接口和线路连接整个手机的各个部分,通过运行或执行存储在存储器2320内的软件程序和/或模块,以及调用存储在存储器2320内的数据,执行手机的各种功能和处理数据,从而对手机进行整体监控。可选的,处理器2380可包括一个或多个处理单元;优选的,处理器2380可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器2380中。The processor 2380 is the control center of the handset, which connects various portions of the entire handset using various interfaces and lines, by executing or executing software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 2320, and invoking data stored in the memory 2320, The phone's various functions and processing data, so that the overall monitoring of the phone. Optionally, the processor 2380 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 2380 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor mainly processes an operating system, a user interface, an application, and the like. The modem processor primarily handles wireless communications. It will be appreciated that the above described modem processor may also not be integrated into the processor 2380.
手机还包括给各个部件供电的电源2390(比如电池),优选的,电源可以通过电源管理系统与处理器2380逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile phone also includes a power source 2390 (such as a battery) for powering various components. Preferably, the power source can be logically coupled to the processor 2380 through a power management system to manage functions such as charging, discharging, and power management through the power management system.
尽管未示出,手机还可以包括摄像头、蓝牙模块等,在此不再赘述。Although not shown, the mobile phone may further include a camera, a Bluetooth module, and the like, and details are not described herein again.
可以理解,在本申请有的实施例中,图23所示实施例的设备的硬件结构也可以为基站的硬件结构。It can be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, the hardware structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 23 may also be the hardware structure of the base station.
图23所示的设备可集成上述图22所示的设置的功能模块,图23所示的设备还可以用于执行上述1)至4)实施例中的任一实施例的相应设备的步骤。The device shown in FIG. 23 can integrate the functional modules of the above-described configuration shown in FIG. 22, and the device shown in FIG. 23 can also be used to perform the steps of the corresponding devices of any of the above embodiments 1) to 4).
在本申请实施例中,RF电路2310为收发器的其中一种具体形式,该设备所包括的收发器和处理器2380还具有以下功能:In the embodiment of the present application, the RF circuit 2310 is one of the specific forms of the transceiver, and the transceiver and the processor 2380 included in the device also have the following functions:
具体情况如下:Details are as follows:
该收发器,具有如下功能:The transceiver has the following functions:
获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;Acquiring a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail The padding portion includes a first color, and the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
该处理器2380,具有如下功能:The processor 2380 has the following functions:
判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;Determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。If the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括校验字段,处理器2380判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,该处理器2380,具有如下功能:Optionally, the tail padding portion further includes a check field. Before the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following functions:
基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;Determining whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field;
若第一Color接收正确,则该处理器2380执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。 If the first Color is received correctly, the processor 2380 performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,或者,第一Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding part further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and the check field are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
可选地,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。Optionally, the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail和校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和第一Color位于Tail之后,且第一Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。处理器判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,该处理器2380,具有如下功能:Optionally, the tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field. In the tail padding portion, the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve the receiving. BCC decoding performance at the end. Before the processor determines whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following functions:
对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码;Perform BCC decoding on the part of Tail before and Tail in the Data domain, and perform Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain;
基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;Determining whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field;
若第一Color接收正确,则中央处理器2380执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the central processing unit 2380 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color,处理器2380判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,该处理器2380,具有如下功能:判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;若PPDU包括存在指示,则处理器2380执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and before the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor 2380 has the following function: determining whether the PPDU is The presence indication is included; if the PPDU includes a presence indication, the processor 2380 performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
综上所述,收发器获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括第一Color,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识,然后,处理器2380判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识,从而,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则处理器2380确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the transceiver acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes the Data field, the Data field includes the physical layer aggregation process service data unit PSDU field and the tail padding part, and the PSDU field includes the control frame and the tail. The padding portion includes a first color, the first color is used to identify the basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs, and then the processor 2380 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used for the first color. The BSS to which the two devices belong is identified, so that if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the processor 2380 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
图24为本申请实施例提供的一种确定BSS归属的设备的结构示意图,该设备可以用于执行上述实施例5)的接收设备的功能,参阅图24,以本申请实施例的设备为第二设备进行描述,FIG. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a device for determining a BSS attribution according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The device may be used to perform the function of the receiving device in the foregoing embodiment 5). Referring to FIG. 24, the device in the embodiment of the present application is The second device is described,
该第二设备包括:The second device includes:
获取单元2401,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确The obtaining unit 2401 is configured to obtain a PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a first color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame and a tail. The padding part includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly.
第一判断单元2402,用于基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;The first determining unit 2402 is configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
第二判断单元2403,用于若第一Color接收正确,则判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;The second determining unit 2403 is configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same if the first color is received correctly, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
确定单元2404,用于若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备 所属的BSS。a determining unit 2404, if the first color and the second color are the same, determining that the control frame is from the second device The BSS to which it belongs.
可选地,Optionally,
尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。The tail padding part includes the first tail information Tail, the check field and the second Tail in sequence, the first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the check field of the receiving end. BCC decoding performance.
可选地,Optionally,
PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color,The PPDU further includes an presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color,
该第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
第三判断单元2405,用于判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;The third determining unit 2405 is configured to determine whether the PPDU includes a presence indication.
若PPDU包括存在指示,则第二判断单元2403执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the second determination unit 2403 performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
综上所述,获取单元2401获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。然后,第一判断单元2402基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则第二判断单元2403判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识。从而,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定单元2404确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以legacy PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the obtaining unit 2401 acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, and the SERVICE domain includes a first color, and the PSDU domain includes The control frame, the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly. Then, the first determining unit 2402 determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the second determining unit 2403 determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. Thus, if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the determining unit 2404 determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the legacy PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective and avoids interference. Increased device signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
本申请的确定BSS归属的设备还具有另一实施例,该设备的结构示意图可参考图23所示的硬件结构示意图,该设备的具体硬件结构可参考图23所示的具体硬件结构。本申请实施例对此不再赘述。The device for determining the BSS ownership of the present application has another embodiment. For a schematic structural diagram of the device, reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
其中,本申请实施例的设备可集成上述图24所示实施例的设备的装置结构,本申请实施例的设备还可以执行上述实施例5)的接收设备的步骤和功能。The device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 24, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the receiving device in the foregoing embodiment 5).
在本申请实施例中,该设备所包括的收发器和处理器还具有以下功能:In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
具体情况如下:Details are as follows:
该收发器,具有如下功能:The transceiver has the following functions:
获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU。其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确;Obtain a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device. The PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a first color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field, and the first color is used for the first device. The associated BSS performs identification, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first Color is received correctly;
该处理器,具有如下功能:The processor has the following functions:
基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确;Determining whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field;
若第一Color接收正确,则判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color 用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;If the first color is received correctly, it is determined whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the second color Used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
若第一Color和第二Color相同,则确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。If the first Color and the second Color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs.
可选地,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail. The first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括第一Color,该处理器判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,该处理器,还具有如下功能:Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and the processor determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the processor further has the following functions:
判断PPDU是否包括存在指示;Determining whether the PPDU includes a presence indication;
若PPDU包括存在指示,则该处理器执行判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes a presence indication, the processor performs the step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
综上所述,收发器获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括第一Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段,第一Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,校验字段用于接收端验证第一Color是否接收正确。然后,处理器基于校验字段判断第一Color是否接收正确。若第一Color接收正确,则处理器判断第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,第二Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识。从而,若第一Color和第二Color相同,则中央处理器确定控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the transceiver acquires the PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes the Data field, the Data field includes the SERVICE domain, the PSDU domain, and the tail padding part, the SERVICE domain includes the first Color, and the PSDU domain includes the control. The frame, the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received correctly. Then, the processor determines whether the first Color is received correctly based on the check field. If the first color is received correctly, the processor determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. Thus, if the first Color and the second Color are the same, the central processor determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
图25为本申请实施例提供的一种发送控制帧的设备的结构示意图。图25所示的实施例可用于执行上述实施例1)至4)中任一实施例中的发送设备的功能。FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in Fig. 25 can be used to perform the functions of the transmitting device in any of the above embodiments 1) to 4).
以该设备为第一设备进行描述,参阅图25,第一设备包括:The device is described as a first device. Referring to FIG. 25, the first device includes:
获取单元2501,用于获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The obtaining unit 2501 is configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs.
生成单元2502,用于根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color;a generating unit 2502, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
发送单元2503,用于向第二设备发送PPDU。The sending unit 2503 is configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
可选地,第一设备还包括:Optionally, the first device further includes:
第一字段生成单元2504,用于根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;a first field generating unit 2504, configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
生成单元2502,还用于根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU的尾填充部分包括校验字段。The generating unit 2502 is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,或者,Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding part further includes tail information Tail, the Color and check fields are located after the Tail, or the Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
可选地,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。Optionally, the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
可选地,该第一设备还包括第二字段生成单元2505和编码单元2506; Optionally, the first device further includes a second field generating unit 2505 and an encoding unit 2506;
第二字段生成单元2505,用于根据Color生成校验字段;a second field generating unit 2505, configured to generate a check field according to Color;
生成单元2502,还用于根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU的尾填充部分包括校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;The generating unit 2502 is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where a tail padding portion of the PPDU includes a check field. In the tail padding part, the check field and the Color are located after the tail information Tail, and the Color is located Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
编码单元2506,用于对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC编码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。The encoding unit 2506 is configured to perform BCC encoding on the Tail portion and the Tail portion in the Data domain, and perform Tail-biting BCC encoding on the portion after the Tail in the Data domain.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
综上所述,获取单元2501获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,生成单元2502根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color。跟着,发送单元2503向第二设备发送PPDU。在第二设备端,第二设备判断该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color是否相同,该预存的Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color相同,则第二设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the obtaining unit 2501 obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the generating unit 2502 generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color. Next, the transmitting unit 2503 transmits a PPDU to the second device. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color. The pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, Then, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
本申请的发送控制帧的设备还具有另一实施例,该设备的结构示意图可参考图23所示的硬件结构示意图,该设备的具体硬件结构可参考图23所示的具体硬件结构。本申请实施例对此不再赘述。The device for transmitting a control frame of the present application has another embodiment. For a schematic structural diagram of the device, reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
其中,本申请实施例的设备可集成上述图25所示实施例的设备的装置结构,本申请实施例的设备还可以执行上述实施例1)至4)的发送设备的步骤和功能。The device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 25, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the sending device in the foregoing embodiments 1) to 4).
在本申请实施例中,该设备所包括的收发器和处理器还具有以下功能:In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
具体情况如下:Details are as follows:
该处理器,具有如下功能:The processor has the following functions:
获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;Obtaining Color, Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color;Generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color;
该收发器,具有如下功能:The transceiver has the following functions:
向第二设备发送PPDU。Sending a PPDU to the second device.
可选地,该收发器向第二设备发送PPDU之前,该处理器,具有如下功能:Optionally, before the transceiver sends the PPDU to the second device, the processor has the following functions:
根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;Generate a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly;
根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU的尾填充部分还包括校验字段。A PPDU carrying a control frame is generated according to the Color and the check field, and the tail padding portion of the PPDU further includes a check field.
可选地,尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,Color和校验字段位于Tail之后,或者,Color和校验字段位于Tail之前,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding part further includes tail information Tail, the Color and check fields are located after the Tail, or the Color and check fields are located before the Tail, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
可选地,尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,Pad为全零序列。 Optionally, the end of the tail-filled portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
可选地,收发器向第二设备发送PPDU之前,该处理器,具有如下功能:Optionally, before the transceiver sends the PPDU to the second device, the processor has the following functions:
根据Color生成校验字段;Generate a check field according to Color;
根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU的尾填充部分包括校验字段,在尾填充部分中,校验字段和Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且Color位于尾填充部分的尾部,Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;A PPDU carrying a control frame is generated according to the Color and check fields. The tail padding part of the PPDU includes a check field. In the tail padding part, the check field and Color are located after the tail information Tail, and the Color is located at the end of the tail padding part, Tail Used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
对Data域中的Tail之前和Tail的部分进行BCC编码,以及对Data域中的Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。Perform BCC encoding on the part before the Tail and Tail in the Data domain, and Tail-biting BCC encoding the part after the Tail in the Data domain.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
综上所述,处理器获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,处理器根据Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括Color。跟着,收发器向第二设备发送PPDU。在第二设备端,第二设备判断该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color是否相同,该预存的Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若该PPDU中的Color和预存的Colorr相同,则第二设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the processor obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the processor generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color. The transceiver then sends a PPDU to the second device. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU and the pre-stored color are the same. The pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored Colorr, Then, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
图26为本申请实施例提供的一种发送控制帧的设备的结构示意图。图26所示的设备可用于执行上述实施例5)的发送设备的功能。参阅图26,以本申请实施例的设备为第一设备进行描述,第一设备包括:FIG. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for sending a control frame according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The apparatus shown in Fig. 26 can be used to perform the functions of the transmitting apparatus of the above embodiment 5). Referring to FIG. 26, the device in this embodiment is described as a first device, where the first device includes:
获取单元2601,用于获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The obtaining unit 2601 is configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs.
字段生成单元2602,用于根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;a field generating unit 2602, configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
生成单元2603,用于根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段;The generating unit 2603 is configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding Part includes the check field;
发送单元2604,用于向第二设备发送PPDU。The sending unit 2604 is configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
可选地,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail. The first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
综上所述,获取单元2601获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,字段生成单元2602根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确。以及,生成单元2603根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段。跟着,发送单元2604向第二设备 发送PPDU。在第二设备端,第二设备判断该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color是否相同,预存的Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color相同,则第二设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域,使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the obtaining unit 2601 acquires Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the field generating unit 2602 generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is correctly received. And, the generating unit 2603 generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail. The padding section includes a check field. Then, the sending unit 2604 goes to the second device Send a PPDU. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, and the pre-stored color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs; if the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, The second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. The color is set in the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field, so that the PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and transmission overhead.
本申请的发送控制帧的设备还具有另一实施例,该设备的结构示意图可参考图23所示的硬件结构示意图,该设备的具体硬件结构可参考图23所示的具体硬件结构。本申请实施例对此不再赘述。The device for transmitting a control frame of the present application has another embodiment. For a schematic structural diagram of the device, reference may be made to the hardware structure shown in FIG. 23, and the specific hardware structure of the device may refer to the specific hardware structure shown in FIG. This embodiment of the present application will not be described again.
其中,本申请实施例的设备可集成上述图26所示实施例的设备的装置结构,本申请实施例的设备还可以执行上述实施例5)的发送设备的步骤和功能。The device in the embodiment of the present application may be integrated with the device structure of the device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 26, and the device in the embodiment of the present application may further perform the steps and functions of the sending device in the foregoing embodiment 5).
在本申请实施例中,该设备所包括的收发器和处理器还具有以下功能:In the embodiment of the present application, the transceiver and the processor included in the device further have the following functions:
具体情况如下:Details are as follows:
该处理器,具有如下功能:The processor has the following functions:
获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;Obtaining Color, Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确;Generate a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly;
根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段;Generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding portion, the SERVICE field includes a Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field.
该收发器,具有如下功能:The transceiver has the following functions:
向第二设备发送PPDU。Sending a PPDU to the second device.
可选地,尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、校验字段和第二Tail,第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,第二Tail用于提高接收端对校验字段的BCC译码性能。Optionally, the tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail. The first Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part of the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the receiving end. BCC decoding performance for the check field.
可选地,PPDU还包括存在指示,存在指示用于指示PPDU包括Color。Optionally, the PPDU further includes a presence indication, and the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes Color.
综上所述,处理器获取Color,Color用于对第一设备所属的BSS进行标识。然后,处理器根据Color生成校验字段,校验字段用于接收端验证Color是否接收正确。以及,处理器根据Color和校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,其中,PPDU包括Data域,Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,SERVICE域包括Color,PSDU域包括控制帧,尾填充部分包括校验字段。跟着。收发器向第二设备发送PPDU。在第二设备端,第二设备判断该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color是否相同,该预存的Color用于对第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;若该PPDU中的Color和预存的Color相同,则第二设备确定该控制帧来自于第二设备所属的BSS;否则,确定该PPDU的控制帧来自于非第二设备所属的BSS。这样,通过Color的比较,设备能有效区分以PPDU格式发送的控制帧,以根据控制帧的归属BSS,执行相应的操作,例如设置正确的NAV,使得双NAV机制更加有效,避免了干扰,增加了设备信号传输机会。而将Color设置在PPDU的尾填充部分或SERVICE域, 使得该PPDU具有后向兼容和传输开销不变的特点。In summary, the processor obtains Color, and Color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs. Then, the processor generates a check field according to Color, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether Color is received correctly. And, the processor generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE field, a PSDU field, and a tail padding part, the SERVICE field includes a Color, and the PSDU field includes a control frame, and a tail padding Part includes the check field. Followed. The transceiver sends a PPDU to the second device. On the second device, the second device determines whether the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color. The pre-stored Color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs. If the color in the PPDU is the same as the pre-stored color, Then, the second device determines that the control frame is from the BSS to which the second device belongs; otherwise, determines that the control frame of the PPDU is from the BSS to which the non-second device belongs. In this way, through the comparison of Color, the device can effectively distinguish the control frame sent in the PPDU format to perform corresponding operations according to the home BSS of the control frame, for example, setting the correct NAV, so that the dual NAV mechanism is more effective, avoiding interference, and increasing Equipment signal transmission opportunities. And set the Color to the tail padding part of the PPDU or the SERVICE field. The PPDU has the characteristics of backward compatibility and constant transmission overhead.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统的架构可参考图1所示的架构图。The embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system. The architecture of the communication system may refer to the architecture diagram shown in FIG. 1.
该通信系统包括第一设备和第二设备,The communication system includes a first device and a second device,
第一设备如上述各个实施例中任一实施例示出的发送设备,详见上述各示例性实施例,此处不再赘述。The first device is a transmitting device, which is shown in any of the foregoing embodiments. For details, refer to the foregoing exemplary embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
第二设备如上述各个实施例中任一实施例示出的接收设备,详见上述各示例性实施例,此处不再赘述。The second device is the receiving device shown in any of the foregoing embodiments, which is described in detail in the foregoing exemplary embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本发明实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存储的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘Solid State Disk(SSD))等。 The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present invention are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be stored by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (SSD)).

Claims (38)

  1. 一种确定BSS归属的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining a BSS attribution, the method comprising:
    第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括第一Color,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;The second device acquires a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of the bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a data domain, where the data domain includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU domain and a tail padding part, The PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, where the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
    所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;The second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
    若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则所述第二设备确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。If the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1 wherein
    所述尾填充部分还包括校验字段,The tail fill portion further includes a check field,
    所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,所述方法还包括:Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes:
    所述第二设备基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;Determining, by the second device, whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则所述第二设备执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 2 wherein:
    所述尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,所述第一Color和所述校验字段位于所述Tail之后,或者,所述第一Color和所述校验字段位于所述Tail之前,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail, the first Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the first Color and the check field are located before the Tail, the Tail It is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that
    所述尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,所述Pad为全零序列。The end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 1 wherein
    所述尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail和校验字段,在所述尾填充部分中,所述校验字段和所述第一Color位于所述Tail之后,且所述第一Color位于所述尾填充部分的尾部,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;The tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field, in the tail padding portion, the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail Filling the tail of the portion, the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
    所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,所述方法还包括:Before the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further includes:
    所述第二设备对所述Data域中的所述Tail之前和所述Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对所述Data域中的所述Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码;The second device performs BCC decoding on the part of the Taail before the Tail and the part of the Tail, and performs Tail-biting BCC decoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain;
    所述第二设备基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;Determining, by the second device, whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则所述第二设备执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  6. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,A method according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述第一Color,所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,所述方法还包括:The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further include:
    所述第二设备判断所述PPDU是否包括所述存在指示;Determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication;
    若所述PPDU包括所述存在指示,则所述第二设备执行判断所述第一Color和预存的 第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the second device performs determining the first color and pre-stored The second color is the same step.
  7. 一种确定BSS归属的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for determining a BSS attribution, the method comprising:
    第二设备获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括第一Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括校验字段,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述第一Color是否接收正确The second device acquires a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a first color, and the PSDU domain The control frame includes a check field, where the first color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the first color is received. correct
    所述第二设备基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;Determining, by the second device, whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;If the first color is received correctly, the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
    若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则所述第二设备确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。If the first color and the second color are the same, the second device determines that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 7 wherein:
    所述尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、所述校验字段和第二Tail,所述第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,所述第二Tail用于提高接收端对所述校验字段的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail, where the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU portions at the receiving end, and the second Tail is used for The BCC decoding performance of the check field is improved at the receiving end.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,Method according to claim 7 or 8, characterized in that
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述第一Color,所述第二设备判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同之前,所述方法还包括:The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and the second device determines whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, the method further include:
    所述第二设备判断所述PPDU是否包括所述存在指示;Determining, by the second device, whether the PPDU includes the presence indication;
    若所述PPDU包括所述存在指示,则所述第二设备执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the second device performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  10. 一种发送控制帧的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting a control frame, the method comprising:
    第一设备获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The first device acquires a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述Color;The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述PPDU。The first device sends the PPDU to a second device.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 10 wherein:
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述PPDU之前,所述方法还包括:Before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method further includes:
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成校验字段,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述Color是否接收正确;The first device generates a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:The generating, by the first device, the PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the color, includes:
    所述第一设备根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU的尾填充部分还包括所述校验字段。The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, and the tail padding portion of the PPDU further includes the check field.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 11 wherein
    所述尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail,The tail filling portion further includes a tail information Tail,
    所述Color和所述校验字段位于所述Tail之后,或者,所述Color和所述校验字段位于 所述Tail之前,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能。The Color and the check field are located after the Tail, or the Color and the check field are located Before the Tail, the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end.
  13. 根据权利要求10至12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein
    所述尾填充部分的末端还包括剩余填充比特Pad,所述Pad为全零序列。The end of the tail-fill portion further includes a remaining padding bit Pad, which is an all-zero sequence.
  14. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 10 wherein:
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述PPDU之前,所述方法还包括:Before the first device sends the PPDU to the second device, the method further includes:
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成校验字段;The first device generates a check field according to the Color;
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,包括:The generating, by the first device, the PPDU of the bearer control frame according to the color, includes:
    所述第一设备根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU的尾填充部分包括所述校验字段,在所述尾填充部分中,所述校验字段和所述Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且所述Color位于所述尾填充部分的尾部,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;Generating, by the first device, a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where a tail padding portion of the PPDU includes the check field, and in the tail padding part, the check field and The color is located after the tail information Tail, and the color is located at the tail of the tail-filling portion, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
    所述第一设备对所述Data域中的所述Tail之前和所述Tail的部分进行BCC编码,以及对所述Data域中的所述Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。The first device performs BCC encoding on the part of the Taail before the Tail and the part of the Tail, and performs Tail-biting BCC encoding on the part after the Tail in the Data domain.
  15. 根据权利要求10至12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to any one of claims 10 to 12, wherein
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述Color。The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication indicating that the PPDU includes the Color.
  16. 一种发送控制帧的方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for transmitting a control frame, the method comprising:
    第一设备获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;The first device acquires a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
    所述第一设备根据所述Color生成校验字段,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述Color是否接收正确;The first device generates a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
    所述第一设备根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述校验字段;The first device generates a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, and the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes the check field;
    所述第一设备向第二设备发送所述PPDU。The first device sends the PPDU to a second device.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,The method of claim 16 wherein:
    所述尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、所述校验字段和第二Tail,所述第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,所述第二Tail用于提高接收端对所述校验字段的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail, where the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU portions at the receiving end, and the second Tail is used for The BCC decoding performance of the check field is improved at the receiving end.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,A method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述Color。The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication indicating that the PPDU includes the Color.
  19. 一种确定BSS归属的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第二设备,所述第二设备包括:A device for determining the affiliation of a BSS, wherein the device is a second device, and the second device includes:
    获取单元,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的物理层汇聚过程协议数据单元PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括第一Color,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;An acquiring unit, configured to acquire a physical layer convergence process protocol data unit PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a data domain, where the data domain includes a PSDU domain and a tail padding part of a physical layer convergence process service data unit, The PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a first color, where the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
    第一判断单元,用于判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识; a first determining unit, configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
    确定单元,用于若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。a determining unit, configured to determine that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 19, characterized in that
    所述尾填充部分还包括校验字段,The tail fill portion further includes a check field,
    所述第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
    第二判断单元,用于基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;a second determining unit, configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则所述第一判断单元执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the first determining unit performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  21. 根据权利要求19所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 19, characterized in that
    所述尾填充部分还包括尾信息Tail和校验字段,在所述尾填充部分中,所述校验字段和所述第一Color位于所述Tail之后,且所述第一Color位于所述尾填充部分的尾部,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;The tail padding portion further includes a tail information Tail and a check field, in the tail padding portion, the check field and the first Color are located after the Tail, and the first color is located at the tail Filling the tail of the portion, the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
    所述第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
    译码单元,用于对所述Data域中的所述Tail之前和所述Tail的部分进行BCC译码,以及对所述Data域中的所述Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC译码;a decoding unit, configured to perform BCC decoding on a portion of the Data field before the Tail and a portion of the Tail, and perform Tail-biting BCC decoding on a portion after the Tail in the Data domain;
    所述第三判断单元,用于基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;The third determining unit is configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则所述第一判断单元执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the first Color is received correctly, the first determining unit performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  22. 根据权利要求19至21任一项所述的设备,Apparatus according to any one of claims 19 to 21,
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述第一Color,所述第二设备还包括:The PPDU further includes a presence indication, where the presence indication is used to indicate that the PPDU includes the first color, and the second device further includes:
    第四判断单元,用于判断所述PPDU是否包括所述存在指示;a fourth determining unit, configured to determine whether the PPDU includes the presence indication;
    若所述PPDU包括所述存在指示,则所述第一判断单元执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the first determining unit performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  23. 一种确定BSS归属的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第二设备,所述第二设备包括:A device for determining the affiliation of a BSS, wherein the device is a second device, and the second device includes:
    获取单元,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括第一Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括校验字段,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述第一Color是否接收正确;An acquiring unit, configured to acquire a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a first color, The PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field, the first color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify the first color. Whether it is received correctly;
    第一判断单元,用于基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;a first determining unit, configured to determine, according to the check field, whether the first color is received correctly;
    第二判断单元,用于若所述第一Color接收正确,则判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;a second determining unit, configured to determine whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same if the first color is received correctly, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs ;
    确定单元,用于若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。a determining unit, configured to determine that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs if the first color and the second color are the same.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 23, wherein
    所述尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、所述校验字段和第二Tail,所述第一Tail 用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,所述第二Tail用于提高接收端对所述校验字段的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion sequentially includes a first tail information Tail, the check field, and a second Tail, the first Tail The Bail decoding performance of the SERVICE and the PSDU part is improved by the receiving end, and the second Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the check field by the receiving end.
  25. 根据权利要求23或24所述的设备,其特征在于,Device according to claim 23 or 24, characterized in that
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述第一Color,The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication indicating that the PPDU includes the first color,
    所述第二设备还包括:The second device further includes:
    第三判断单元,用于判断所述PPDU是否包括所述存在指示;a third determining unit, configured to determine whether the PPDU includes the presence indication;
    若所述PPDU包括所述存在指示,则所述第二判断单元执行判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同的步骤。If the PPDU includes the presence indication, the second determining unit performs a step of determining whether the first Color and the pre-stored second Color are the same.
  26. 一种发送控制帧的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第一设备,所述第一设备包括:A device for transmitting a control frame, where the device is a first device, and the first device includes:
    获取单元,用于获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;An acquiring unit, configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs;
    生成单元,用于根据所述Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述Color;a generating unit, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a Color
    发送单元,用于向第二设备发送所述PPDU。And a sending unit, configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 26, wherein
    所述第一设备还包括:The first device further includes:
    第一字段生成单元,用于根据所述Color生成校验字段,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述Color是否接收正确;a first field generating unit, configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the color is received correctly;
    所述生成单元,还用于根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU的尾填充部分包括所述校验字段。The generating unit is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where a tail padding portion of the PPDU includes the check field.
  28. 根据权利要求26所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 26, wherein
    所述第一设备还包括第二字段生成单元和编码单元,The first device further includes a second field generating unit and an encoding unit,
    所述第二字段生成单元,用于根据所述Color生成校验字段;The second field generating unit is configured to generate a check field according to the Color;
    所述生成单元,还用于根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU的尾填充部分包括所述校验字段,在所述尾填充部分中,所述校验字段和所述Color位于尾信息Tail之后,且所述Color位于所述尾填充部分的尾部,所述Tail用于提高接收端的BCC译码性能;The generating unit is further configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where a tail padding portion of the PPDU includes the check field, and in the tail padding part, the school The field and the color are located after the tail information Tail, and the color is located at the tail of the tail padding portion, and the Tail is used to improve the BCC decoding performance of the receiving end;
    所述编码单元,用于对所述Data域中的所述Tail之前和所述Tail的部分进行BCC编码,以及对所述Data域中的所述Tail之后的部分进行Tail-biting BCC编码。The coding unit is configured to perform BCC coding on the part of the Taail before the Tail and the part of the Tail, and perform Tail-biting BCC coding on a part after the Tail in the Data domain.
  29. 根据权利要求26至28任一项所述的设备,其特征在于,Apparatus according to any one of claims 26 to 28, wherein
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述Color。The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication indicating that the PPDU includes the Color.
  30. 一种发送控制帧的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第一设备,所述第一设备包括:A device for transmitting a control frame, where the device is a first device, and the first device includes:
    获取单元,用于获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;An acquiring unit, configured to acquire a color, where the color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs;
    字段生成单元,用于根据所述Color生成校验字段,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述Color是否接收正确;a field generating unit, configured to generate a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the color is received correctly;
    生成单元,用于根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域 包括所述Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述校验字段;a generating unit, configured to generate a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, and the SERVICE domain Including the Color, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes the check field;
    发送单元,用于向第二设备发送所述PPDU。And a sending unit, configured to send the PPDU to the second device.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的设备,其特征在于,The device according to claim 30, wherein
    所述尾填充部分依次包括第一尾信息Tail、所述校验字段和第二Tail,所述第一Tail用于提高接收端对SERVICE和PSDU部分的BCC译码性能,所述第二Tail用于提高接收端对所述校验字段的BCC译码性能。The tail padding portion includes a first tail information Tail, a check field, and a second Tail, where the first Tail is used to improve BCC decoding performance of the SERVICE and PSDU portions at the receiving end, and the second Tail is used for The BCC decoding performance of the check field is improved at the receiving end.
  32. 根据权利要求30或31所述的设备,其特征在于,Device according to claim 30 or 31, characterized in that
    所述PPDU还包括存在指示,所述存在指示用于指示所述PPDU包括所述Color。The PPDU further includes a presence indication, the presence indication indicating that the PPDU includes the Color.
  33. 一种确定BSS归属的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第二设备,所述设备包括收发器、处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储有确定BSS归属的程序,A device for determining a BSS attribution, wherein the device is a second device, the device includes a transceiver, a processor, and a memory, where the memory stores a program for determining a BSS attribution,
    所述收发器,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括物理层汇聚过程服务数据单元PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括第一Color,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的基本服务集BSS进行标识;The transceiver is configured to acquire a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a physical layer convergence process service data unit PSDU field and a tail padding part, where the PSDU domain includes a control frame, the tail padding portion includes a first color, where the first color is used to identify a basic service set BSS to which the first device belongs;
    所述处理器读取所述存储器存储的所述程序,所述处理器执行如下步骤:The processor reads the program stored by the memory, and the processor performs the following steps:
    判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;Determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
    若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。If the first color and the second color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs.
  34. 一种确定BSS归属的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第二设备,所述设备包括收发器、处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储有确定BSS归属的程序,A device for determining a BSS attribution, wherein the device is a second device, the device includes a transceiver, a processor, and a memory, where the memory stores a program for determining a BSS attribution,
    所述收发器,用于获取第一设备发送的承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括第一Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括校验字段,所述第一Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述第一Color是否接收正确;The transceiver is configured to acquire a PPDU of a bearer control frame sent by the first device, where the PPDU includes a Data field, where the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding part, where the SERVICE domain includes a first color, The PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes a check field, where the first color is used to identify a BSS to which the first device belongs, and the check field is used by the receiving end to verify the Whether a Color is received correctly;
    所述处理器读取所述存储器存储的所述程序,所述处理器执行如下步骤:The processor reads the program stored by the memory, and the processor performs the following steps:
    基于所述校验字段判断所述第一Color是否接收正确;Determining whether the first color is received correctly based on the check field;
    若所述第一Color接收正确,则判断所述第一Color和预存的第二Color是否相同,所述第二Color用于对所述第二设备所属的BSS进行标识;If the first color is received correctly, determining whether the first color and the pre-stored second color are the same, and the second color is used to identify the BSS to which the second device belongs;
    若所述第一Color和所述第二Color相同,则确定所述控制帧来自于所述第二设备所属的BSS。If the first color and the second color are the same, it is determined that the control frame is from a BSS to which the second device belongs.
  35. 一种发送控制帧的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第一设备,所述设备包括收发器、处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储有程序,An apparatus for transmitting a control frame, wherein the device is a first device, the device includes a transceiver, a processor, and a memory, where the memory stores a program,
    所述处理器读取所述存储器存储的所述程序,所述处理器执行如下步骤:The processor reads the program stored by the memory, and the processor performs the following steps:
    获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;Obtaining a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
    根据所述Color生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述Color; Generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color, the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a PSDU field and a tail padding portion, the PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes the Color;
    所述收发器,用于向第二设备发送所述PPDU。The transceiver is configured to send the PPDU to a second device.
  36. 一种发送控制帧的设备,其特征在于,所述设备为第一设备,所述设备包括收发器、处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储有程序,An apparatus for transmitting a control frame, wherein the device is a first device, the device includes a transceiver, a processor, and a memory, where the memory stores a program,
    所述处理器读取所述存储器存储的所述程序,所述处理器执行如下步骤:The processor reads the program stored by the memory, and the processor performs the following steps:
    获取Color,所述Color用于对所述第一设备所属的BSS进行标识;Obtaining a color, where the color is used to identify the BSS to which the first device belongs;
    根据所述Color生成校验字段,所述校验字段用于接收端验证所述Color是否接收正确;Generating a check field according to the Color, where the check field is used by the receiving end to verify whether the Color is received correctly;
    根据所述Color和所述校验字段生成承载控制帧的PPDU,所述PPDU包括Data域,所述Data域包括SERVICE域、PSDU域和尾填充部分,所述SERVICE域包括所述Color,所述PSDU域包括控制帧,所述尾填充部分包括所述校验字段;Generating a PPDU carrying a control frame according to the Color and the check field, where the PPDU includes a Data field, the Data field includes a SERVICE domain, a PSDU domain, and a tail padding portion, and the SERVICE domain includes the Color, The PSDU field includes a control frame, and the tail padding portion includes the check field;
    所述收发器,用于向第二设备发送所述PPDU。The transceiver is configured to send the PPDU to a second device.
  37. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-18任意一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium comprising instructions which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-18.
  38. 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-18任意一项所述的方法。 A computer program product comprising instructions which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-18.
PCT/CN2017/073613 2016-11-03 2017-02-15 Method for determining bss attribution, method for sending control frame and related device WO2018082219A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201780066006.0A CN109906664B (en) 2016-11-03 2017-02-15 Method for determining BSS attribution, method for sending control frame and related equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201610953030.3 2016-11-03
CN201610953030 2016-11-03

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2018082219A1 true WO2018082219A1 (en) 2018-05-11

Family

ID=62076607

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2017/073613 WO2018082219A1 (en) 2016-11-03 2017-02-15 Method for determining bss attribution, method for sending control frame and related device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN109906664B (en)
WO (1) WO2018082219A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111711978B (en) * 2020-05-29 2022-08-12 广州视源电子科技股份有限公司 BSS coloring method and device in proximity-aware network and wireless access equipment

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016006312A1 (en) * 2014-07-11 2016-01-14 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and program
WO2016028124A1 (en) * 2014-08-21 2016-02-25 엘지전자(주) Data transmission method in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor
CN105684541A (en) * 2013-10-23 2016-06-15 高通股份有限公司 System, method and device for dynamically setting response indication deferral in wireless networks

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2400935C2 (en) * 2006-04-25 2010-09-27 Интердиджитал Текнолоджи Корпорейшн Operation of high throughput capacity channel in mesh wireless local network
EP2548316B1 (en) * 2010-03-15 2018-12-19 LG Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting frame in wlan system
EP3061296B1 (en) * 2014-02-10 2018-06-06 MediaTek Inc. Method for identifying source bss in wlan
CN105916211B (en) * 2016-04-13 2019-02-22 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 Communication means and communication device, the website and access point of WLAN

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105684541A (en) * 2013-10-23 2016-06-15 高通股份有限公司 System, method and device for dynamically setting response indication deferral in wireless networks
WO2016006312A1 (en) * 2014-07-11 2016-01-14 ソニー株式会社 Information processing device, information processing method, and program
WO2016028124A1 (en) * 2014-08-21 2016-02-25 엘지전자(주) Data transmission method in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN109906664B (en) 2021-04-09
CN109906664A (en) 2019-06-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6195879B2 (en) Apparatus and method for control exchange of media access control
RU2614563C2 (en) Systems and methods for generation and decoding of short control frames during wireless communication
TWI524800B (en) Request to send (rts) and clear to send (cts) for multichannel operations
CN104272797B (en) Effective medium access controls (MAC) header
KR101689270B1 (en) Apparatus and methods for block acknowledgment compression
JP6342395B2 (en) Apparatus and method for frame control design
US20220069933A1 (en) Support for additional decoding processing time in wireless lan systems
KR102567613B1 (en) Wireless communication method using frame aggregation and wireless communication terminal using same
KR20080074854A (en) Fast control messaging mechanism for use in wireless network communications
TW201625054A (en) Systems, methods, and devices for extending range of wireless networks
JP6416256B2 (en) Channel access deferral mechanism
JP2017502564A (en) Extended block acknowledgment protocol
BR112017006508B1 (en) DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, DATA RECEPTION METHOD, TRANSMISSION END DEVICE AND RECEIVING END DEVICE
WO2015074237A1 (en) Data transmission method and data transmission device
WO2019137379A1 (en) Uci transmission method and mobile terminal
WO2018082219A1 (en) Method for determining bss attribution, method for sending control frame and related device
KR20220031081A (en) Data transmission and reception method and device
WO2021204046A1 (en) Tbs determination method and related device
US20220167319A1 (en) Mpdu padding for harq operation
KR20080096773A (en) Transmit announcement indication
JP2019514283A (en) Wireless communication method using fragmentation and wireless communication terminal using the same
US20180338345A1 (en) Method and apparatus for relay duplexing in wireless lan
WO2022170851A1 (en) Information indication method and apparatus
WO2016101364A1 (en) Data packet transmission method and apparatus in wireless local area network
US20210184794A1 (en) Glitch free audio in noisy environments

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17867442

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17867442

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1